Notice
Note that when converting this document from its original format to a .pdf file,
some minor font and format changes may occur causing slight variations from the
original printed document. When viewing and printing this document, we cannot
guarantee that your specific PC or printer will support all of the fonts or graphics.
Therefore, when you view the document, fonts may be substituted and your
individual printer may not have the capability to print the document correctly.
ELECTRA ELITE ENHANCEMENT GUIDE TO IPK
MIGRATING FROM ELECTRA ELITE 48/192 TO
ELECTRA ELITE IPK
Stock Number 750831
Document Revision 1
NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions,
or features at any time without notice.
NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and
customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC
America, Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval of
NEC America, Inc.
Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation and Electra Elite is a
registered trademarks of NEC America, Inc. Windows is a registered
trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Copyright 2003
NEC Infrontia, Inc.
6535 N. State Highway 161
Irving TX 75039-2402
Technology Development
Important Note About This
Upgrade Procedure
___________________________________________________________________________________
This document provides all of the necessary information to upgrade your system to
Electra Elite IPK Release 1000 software and to install the related hardware.
This document is not intended as replacement pages for your current manuals.
However, it can be used to supplement those manuals.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
___________________________________________________________________________________
Software Upgrade Procedures
Migration from Electra Elite 48/192 ...................................................................... 1-1
Series 8000 Upgrade Precautions ....................................................................... 1-1
Direct Download from the Installed Elite System ................................................. 1-2
Import the Elite Database Saved using a Previous Version of the Electra
Elite SAT (S7000 or below) ............................................................................... 1-10
Series 8000 Upgrade Precautions ..................................................................... 1-10
Upgrade Procedure for CCH(4)-U( ) ETU .......................................................... 1-18
Upgrade Procedure for MIFM-U( ) ..................................................................... 1-21
Upgrade Procedure for PRT(1)-U( ) ETU .......................................................... 1-24
Hardware
1.1
B64-U20 KSU ....................................................................................................2-1
1.1.1
Basic KSU ................................................................................................... 2-1
1.1.2
Expansion KSUs .......................................................................................... 2-1
1.2
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU ..............................................................................................2-2
1.3
PKU 192-U (Port Key Unit) ................................................................................2-6
1.4
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU ..............................................................................................2-7
1.5
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU ..............................................................................................2-9
Electra Elite IPK Feature sandSpecifications
Attendant Transfer .................................................................................................. 3-1
Authorization Code (New Feature) ......................................................................... 3-4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite IPK System Upgrade Enhancement
i
___
Do __
cu __
me ___
nt
__
Rev __
i
__
son __
1 _____________________________________________________
E ___
le
__
ctra __
Eli __
te ___
IPK
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys ...........................................................................................3-8
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks) .....................................................................3-12
Electra Elite IPK Terminals ...................................................................................3-17
Electra Elite Terminal Migration ............................................................................3-23
Electronic Volume Control .....................................................................................3-26
Elite ACD Plus .......................................................................................................3-29
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me) ..........................................................................3-38
Full Duplex Handsfree ...........................................................................................3-41
Internal HUB ..........................................................................................................3-43
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections ...............................................................................3-47
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections ...............................................................................3-51
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) ..........................................3-59
Music on Hold .......................................................................................................3-75
Station Transfer .....................................................................................................3-78
T1 Connection .......................................................................................................3-81
Universal Slots ......................................................................................................3-85
Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications for K-CCIS
Centralized Billing (K-CCIS) ....................................................................................4-1
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change (K-CCIS) ......................................................4-6
Dial Access to Attendant (K-CCIS) .......................................................................4-11
Paging Access (K-CCIS) .......................................................................................4-17
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revison 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
PROGRAMMING
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment ...................................................... 5-2
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment ...................................................... 5-7
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment ...................................................... 5-8
1-2-04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment .................................................... 5-10
1-2-32
IP Phone Block Assignment .............................................................. 5-12
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 .............................. 5-14
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 .................................. 5-17
1-8-27
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Length Assignment ........ 5-22
1-8-33
Master Clock Selection ...................................................................... 5-24
1-11-00
T1 Signal Format Selection ............................................................... 5-26
1-11-01
Clear Channel Selection .................................................................... 5-27
1-11-02
Line Length Selection ........................................................................ 5-28
1-11-05
T1 Channel Selection ........................................................................ 5-29
1-11-06
Signaling Selection ............................................................................ 5-31
1-11-07
DTI Trunk Type Assignment .............................................................. 5-32
1-11-08
Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment ................................................. 5-34
1-13-00
PRT Channel Assignment ................................................................. 5-36
1-13-02
Clear Channel Selection .................................................................... 5-38
1-13-04
PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority Selection ...................................... 5-39
1-13-05
PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group Assignment .................................... 5-41
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment .................................... 5-43
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment .................................... 5-46
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection ........................................... 5-48
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment .......... 5-50
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment ...... 5-52
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite IPK System Upgrade Enhancement
iii
___
Do __
cu __
me ___
nt
__
Rev __
i
__
son __
1 _____________________________________________________
E ___
le
__
ctra __
Eli __
te ___
IPK
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment ............5-54
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection ....................................................5-56
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base-T .............................................5-58
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection ...............................................................5-60
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection .................................................................5-62
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection ........................................................................5-64
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment .............................................................5-66
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection ..............................................................5-68
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment .......................................................5-70
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment .......................................................5-72
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment ........................................................5-74
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection ......................................................................5-76
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment .....................................................5-78
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment ......................................................5-80
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment ................................................5-82
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection .........................................................5-84
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection ............................................................5-86
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection ...............................................5-88
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex ...........................................................5-90
3-12
Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment ......................................................5-92
4-47
ISDN Directory Number Selection ......................................................5-93
4-50
Multiline Terminal Type Selection ......................................................5-95
4-64
Code Restriction Class (without Authorization Code) Day Mode
Assignment .........................................................................................5-97
4-65
Code Restriction Class (without Authorization Code) Night Mode
Assignment .........................................................................................5-99
4-66
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection ..................................................5-101
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
Table of Contents
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revison 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-67
IP Station Number Assignment ....................................................... 5-103
4-68
LCD Line Key Name Assignment ................................................. 5-105
4-92
Receiving Volume Selection ............................................................ 5-108
5-06
Trunk Group Outgoing Priority Selection ......................................... 5-109
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment ....................................................... 5-110
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite IPK System Upgrade Enhancement
v
___
Do __
cu __
me ___
nt
__
Rev __
i
__
son __
1 _____________________________________________________
E ___
le
__
ctra __
Eli __
te ___
IPK
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
vi
Table of Contents
Software Upgrade Procedures
Electra Elite IPK R1000 Upgrade
Procedure for Electra Elite 48/192
___________________________________________________________________________________
MIGRATION FROM ELECTRA ELITE 48/192
Use the following instructions to migrate from an existing Electra Elite 48/192 system to an Electra Elite
IPK R1000 system.
The Electra Elite IPK System Administration Terminal (SAT) software must be used to perform this
upgrade. The MIFM-U( ) ETU is required for PC Programming and must be installed.
Two methods to access the database from the existing system are explained below:
H Direct download from the installed system
H Import the Elite database saved using a previous version of the Electra Elite SAT
SERIES 8000 UPGRADE PRECAUTIONS
When upgrading from an Electra Elite 48 (S8000) to an Electra Elite IPK Basic port package (R1000),
Memory Block 1-2-32 (IP Phone Block Assignment) must be at default (unassigned). The two systems
use different Tel Port Numbers.
IP Phone Numbers assigned to the following memory blocks must also be unassigned:
·
1-1-29 Private Line Assignment
·
1-1-78 Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode
·
1-2-08 Specified Station Access Code Assignment
·
1-6-05 Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
·
4-XX All 4-XX Memory Blocks.
These assignments should be recorded and entered into the system again after the upgrade. Refer to
Memory Block 1-2-32 for more details.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 1
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
DIRECT DOWNLOAD FROM THE INSTALLED ELITE SYSTEM
1.
Verify that the battery is connected to CN4 on Elite192 CPUB( )-U( ) or Elite 48 MBD-U( ) Unit.
2.
Confirm and record the following settings:
J
Answer Preset
J
Automated Attendant/DISA mode
J
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer mode
J
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Outgoing Trunk
J
Background Music
J
Call Forward All Calls, Busy, No Answer, Busy/No Answer, Centrex/Off-Premise/Split
J
Callback Messages
J
Customized Message Display
J
Day/Night Mode (System and Tenant)
J
Do Not Disturb
J
MIC Settings
J
Timed Alarm
The following memories are empty after the upgrade:
J
Last Number Dialed Memory
J
Recorded messages in the VRS(4)-U( ) ETUs (messages must be recorded again)
J
Store & Repeat/Save & Repeat
3.
Select IPK, enter the password, and click OK to open Electra Elite IPK SAT.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 2
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
From the Communications Menu, Select Connect to connect the Elite system.
5.
From the Communications menu, select Download and click Start to download the database from
the Electra Elite system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 3
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.
When the download is finished, select Save As from the File menu and enter a file name.
J
When the system is to be saved as Elite IPK Basic, confirm that Save as type is Elite IPK
Basic (R1000) (*.rdf), and click Save.
Only the Electra Elite 48 system can be saved as Elite IPK Basic.
J
When the system is to be saved as Elite IPK Expanded, confirm that Save as type is Elite IPK
Expanded (R1000) (*.rdf) and click Save.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 4
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.
From the Communications menu, select Disconnect to disconnect from the Elite system.
8.
Assign any other required system data assignment changes and from the File menu, select Save if
required.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 5
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
9.
Change hardware from the Elite System to the Electra Elite IPK system.
Upgrade Type
Comments
Electra Elite 48 to Electra Elite IPK Basic
Replace the B48-U10 KSU hardware with the
Port Package
following:
B64-U20 KSU
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU (without PKU 192-U)
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU in slot 1 *
Move all other hardware to new KSU.
Electra Elite 48 to Electra Elite IPK
Replace the B48-U10 KSU hardware with the
Expanded Port Package
following:
B64-U20 KSU
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU (with PKU 192-U)
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU in slot 1 *
Move all other hardware to new KSU.
Electra Elite 192 to Electra Elite IPK Basic
Not supported.
Port Package
Electra Elite 192 to Electra Elite IPK
Replace the B64-U10 KSUs with the B64-U20
Expanded Port Package with new IPK
KSUs.
KSUs
Replace the CPUB( )-U( ) ETU with the
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU with PKU 192-U).
Move all other hardware to new KSUs.
Electra Elite 192 to Electra Elite IPK
Replace the CPUB( )-U( ) ETU with the
Expanded Port Package without new IPK
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU with PKU 192-U.
KSUs (Retrofit)
* The ESI(8)-U( ) or ESIB-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 6
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
10.
From the Communications menu, select connect to connect the Electra Elite IPK.
11.
From the Communications menu, select Upload, and click Start.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 7
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
12.
Click Hardware Upload.
13.
When Upload is complete, click Close.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 8
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
14.
From the Communications menu, Select Disconnect to disconnect from Electra Elite IPK.
15.
Reassign all settings recorded in Step 2, and confirm proper system operation.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 9
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
IMPORT THE ELITE DATABASE SAVED USING A PREVIOUS VERSION OF THE ELECTRA ELITE
SAT (S7000 OR BELOW)
1.
Verify that the battery is connected to CN4 on Elite192 CPUB( )-U( ) or Elite 48 MBD-U( ) Unit.
2.
Confirm and record the following settings:
J
Answer Preset
J
Automated Attendant/DISA mode
J
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer mode
J
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Outgoing Trunk
J
Background Music
J
Call Forward All Calls, Busy, No Answer, Busy/No Answer, Centrex/Off-Premise/Split
J
Callback Messages
J
Customized Message Display
J
Day/Night Mode (System and Tenant)
J
Do Not Disturb
J
MIC Settings
J
Timed Alarm
The following memories are empty after the upgrade:
J
Last Number Dialed Memory
J
Recorded messages in the VRS(4)-U( ) ETUs (messages must be recorded again)
J
Store & Repeat/Save & Repeat
SERIES 8000 UPGRADE PRECAUTIONS
When upgrading from an Electra Elite S8000 system to an Electra Elite IPK system, Electra Elite IPK
SAT must be used to download the S8000 database.
When upgrading from an Electra Elite 48 (S8000) to an Electra Elite IPK Basic port package (R1000),
Memory Block 1-2-32 (IP Phone Block Assignment) must be at default (unassigned). The two systems
use different Tel Port Numbers.
IP Phone Numbers assigned to the following memory blocks must also be unassigned:
·
1-1-29 Private Line Assignment
·
1-1-78 Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode
·
1-2-08 Specified Station Access Code Assignment
·
1-6-05 Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
·
4-XX All 4-XX Memory Blocks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 10
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
These assignments should be recorded and entered into the system again after the upgrade. Refer to
Memory Block 1-2-32 for more details.
3.
Select IPK, enter the password, and click OK to open Electra Elite IPK SAT.
4.
From the File menu, select Import Elite file to import a previously saved database.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 11
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.
Locate the directory where the Elite database is stored. Select file name and click Open to import
the database.
6.
When the download is finished, select Save As from the File menu and enter a file name.
J
When the system is to be saved as Elite IPK Basic, confirm that Save as type is Elite IPK
Basic (R1000) (*.rdf), and click Save.
Only the Electra Elite 48 system can be saved as Elite IPK Basic.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 12
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
When the system is to be saved as Elite IPK Expanded, confirm that Save as type is Elite IPK
Expanded (R1000) (*.rdf) and click Save.
7.
Assign any other required system data assignment changes and from the File menu, select Save if
required.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 13
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
8.
Change hardware from the Elite System to the Electra Elite IPK system.
Upgrade Type
Comments
Electra Elite 48 to Electra Elite IPK Basic
Replace the B48-U10 KSU hardware with the
Port Package
following:
B64-U20 KSU
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU (without PKU 192-U)
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU in slot 1 *
Move all other hardware to new KSU.
Electra Elite 48 to Electra Elite IPK
Replace the B48-U10 KSU hardware with the
Expanded Port Package
following:
B64-U20 KSU
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU (with PKU 192-U)
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU in slot 1 *
Move all other hardware to new KSU.
Electra Elite 192 to Electra Elite IPK Basic
Not supported.
Port Package
Electra Elite 192 to Electra Elite IPK
Replace the B64-U10 KSUs with the B64-U20
Expanded Port Package with new IPK
KSUs.
KSUs
Replace the CPUB( )-U( ) ETU with the CPUI( )-U( )
ETU with PKU192-U).
Move all other hardware to new KSUs.
Electra Elite 192 to Electra Elite IPK
Replace the CPUB( )-U( ) ETU with the CPUI( )-U( )
Expanded Port Package without new IPK
ETU with PKU 192-U.
KSUs (Retrofit)
*The ESI(8)-U( ) or ESIB-U( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 14
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
9.
From the Communications menu, select Connect to connect to the Electra Elite IPK.
10.
From the Communications menu, select Upload, and click Start.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 15
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
11.
Click Hardware Upload.
12.
When Upload is finished, Click Close.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 16
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
13.
From the Communications menu, select Disconnect to disconnect from the Electra Elite IPK.
14.
Reassign all settings recorded in Step 2 and confirm proper system operation.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 17
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
UPGRADE PROCEDURE FOR CCH(4)-U( ) ETU
UPGRADE DESCRIPTiON
The CCH(4)-U( ) ETU must be updated to firmware V2.0 or higher to be compatible with the Electra
Elite IPK (R1000) system.
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
Observe the following precautions when installing the ETU to avoid damage to
hardware due to static electricity or to being exposed to hazardous voltages.
( The ETUs used in this system make extensive use of CMOS technology. CMOS technology is
very susceptible to static; therefore, extreme care must be taken to avoid static discharge when
handling ETUs and units.
( When carrying a ETU or unit be sure to keep it in a conductive polyethylene bag to prevent
damage due to static electricity.
( When handling a ETU or unit the installer must wear a grounded wrist strap to protect the ETU or
unit from static electricity.
SOFTWARE UPGRADE INSTALLATION
To upgrade software on the Electra Elite CCH(4)-U( ) ETU:
1.
Remove the CCH(4)-U( )ETU from the KSU.
This ETU can be removed with system power on.
2.
Install the CCH REV 2.XX EPROM in IC30 on the CCH(4)-U( ) ETU.
Ensure that the notch on the chip is aligned to the notch on the socket.
CCH REV 2.XX EPROM can be used to upgrade all installed CCH(4)-U( ) ETUs .
This ETU must be upgraded to firmware V2.0 or higher to be compatible with the Electra Elite IPK.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 18
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Place DIP switches as shown below:
J
SW2-1
ON
J
SW2-2
ON
J
SW2-3
ON
J
SW2-4
ON
Figure 1-1 CCH(4)-U10 ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 19
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Install the CCH(4)-U( ) ETU in the KSU. LED 10 flashes.
5.
After LEDs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 light one at a time, LEDs 1, 2, 3, and 4 light one at a time again.
When LED 4 is on steady, remove the CCH(4)-U( ) ETU from the KSU.
6.
Remove the EPROM from IC 30.
7.
Place switch SW2-1, -2, -3, and -4 in original position (OFF).
8.
Install the CCH(4)-U( ) ETU in the KSU.
SOFTWARE VERIFICATION FOR CCH(4)-U10 KSU
To verify the revision:
1.
Go offline.
2.
Press LK8 and LK1.
G
3.
Press
to locate the CCH(4)-U( ) ETU.
4.
Verify that the current software version number is displayed.
E
5.
Press
to go back online.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 20
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
UPGRADE PROCEDURE FOR MIFM-U( )
UPGRADE DESCRIPTION
This ETU must be upgraded to firmware V5.00 or higher to be compatible with the Electra Elite IPK
(R1000) system to support the following features:
( Caller ID Indication 50 Caller ID scroll buffers
( Centralized Billing (K-CCIS)
The Caller ID scroll buffers are erased when firmware is upgraded.
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
Observe the following precautions when installing the ETUs to avoid damage to
hardware due to static electricity or to being exposed to hazardous voltages.
( The ETUs and units used in this system make extensive use of CMOS technology. CMOS
technology is very susceptible to static; therefore, extreme care must be taken to avoid static
discharge when handling ETUs and units.
( When carrying a ETU or unit be sure to keep it in a conductive polyethylene bag to prevent
damage due to static electricity.
( When handling a ETU or unit the installer must wear a grounded wrist strap to protect the ETU or
unit from static electricity.
SOFTWARE UPGRADE PROCEDURE
Use the following procedure for software upgrade of the MIFM-U( ) ETU.
1.
Remove the MIFM-U10 ETU from the KSU.
2.
Mount the EPROM labeled "MIFM Rev 5.XX" on MIFM-U10 card (IC8). Refer to Figure 1-2
MIFM-U( ) ETU for a diagram of the card.
3.
Set the switch SW1 to OFF (EPROM) and set the DIP SW2-1 and SW2-2 to ON. Refer to Figure
1-2 MIFM-U( ) ETU for a diagram of the card.
4.
Install MIFM-U10 ETU into same slot from Step 1 of the KSU. Notice that LED 1 is winking or
flashing.
5.
After LED 1 goes off, pull out the MIFM-U10 card from the KSU.
6.
Remove the EPROM and set switch SW1 to ON (FROM) and set DIP SW2-1 and SW2-2 to OFF.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 21
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.
Install the MIFM-U10 into the same slot from Step 1 of the KSU.
Figure 1-2 MIFM-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 22
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
SOFTWARE VERIFICATION FOR MIFM( )-U10 ETU
To verify the current software version installed on the MIFM( )-U10 ETU do the following:
1.
Go off-line.
2.
Press LK8 + LK1 to access the Memory Block.
G
3.
Press
to locate the MIFM( )-U10 ETU.
4.
Verify that the current software revision number is displayed.
E
5.
Press
to go back on line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 23
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
UPGRADE PROCEDURE FOR PRT(1)-U( ) ETU
UPGRADE DESCRIPTION
The PRT(1)-U( ) ETU must be updated to firmware V4.00 or higher to be compatible with the Electra
Elite IPK (R1000) system for individual channel assignment and PRT B channel-to-trunk group
assignment.
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
Observe the following precautions when installing the ETUs to avoid damage to
hardware due to static electricity or to being exposed to hazardous voltages.
( The ETUs and units used in this system make extensive use of CMOS technology. CMOS
technology is very susceptible to static; therefore, extreme care must be taken to avoid static
discharge when handling ETUs and units.
( When carrying a ETU or unit be sure to keep it in a conductive polyethylene bag to prevent
damage due to static electricity.
( When handling a ETU or unit the installer must wear a grounded wrist strap to protect the ETU or
unit from static electricity.
PRT SOFTWARE CHIP INSTALLATION
1.
Remove the PRT(1)-U( ) card from the system.
This card can be removed with the system power on.
2.
Remove the old chip located on IC2.
3.
Install the new PRT chip on IC2.
Ensure that the notch on the chip lines up with the notch on the socket.
This ETU must be updated to firmware V4.00 or higher to be compatible with the Electra Elite IPK for
individual Channel Assignment and PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group Assignment.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 24
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 1-3 PRT(1)-U( ) ETU
4.
Install the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU in the KSU.
SOFTWARE VERIFICATION
To verify that the software revision was installed:
1.
Go Off-Line.
2.
Press LK8 + LK1.
G
3.
Press
to locate the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU.
4.
Verify that the current software version number is displayed.
E
5.
Press
to go back On-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
1 - 25
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 26
Hardware
Hardware Description
and Specifications
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.1
B64-U20 KSU
1.1.1
Basic KSU
The B64-U20 KSU provides service for outside lines, Attendant Consoles, and
interconnection of the station terminals. The B64-U20 KSU has two fixed and eight
flexible slots. The first fixed slot is reserved for the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU in the basic KSU
or for the EXP-U( ) ETU in expansion KSUs. The second fixed slot is for the MIFA-U( )
ETU or MIFM-U( ) ETU.
The P64-U10 PSU (power supply unit), backup batteries, and three PFT relays are
included with each KSU.
1.1.2
Expansion KSUs
The B64-U20 KSU is also used as the expansion unit that can be attached to the basic
KSU to provide additional ports. Two expansion units can be added to the Electra Elite
IPK system. Each expansion KSU provides eight flexible slots and accommodates 8-,
16-, 24-channel interface cards. The P64-U10 PSU (power supply unit), backup
batteries, and three PFT relays are included with each KSU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
2 - 1
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The installation instructions provided in this chapter apply to the basic B64-U20 KSU
and the expansion B64-U20 KSUs unless otherwise specified.
Figure 2-1 B64-U20 KSU
1.2
CPUI( )-U( ) ETU
Description
The CPUI( )-U( ) ETU is the Central Processing Unit for the system. This ETU has a Central
Processing Unit and a Microprocessing Unit.
A 32-bit microprocessor executes the programs stored on the Flash ROM ICs of the MPU unit.
This controls the entire system when data is transferred to and from other ETUs.
This ETU provides the following items:
H
Time Division Switch (TDSW)
H
Static Random Access Memory (SRAM)
H
32-bit Processor
H
4-channel DTMF Receiver (PBR)
H
Sixteen 4-party Conference Circuits
H
Internal (digital music) Music-on-Hold source
H
External Music-on-Hold input (also used for station background music)
H
Flash ROM
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 2
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Call Progress and DTMF Tone Generator
H
Memory Backup Battery (Retains memory for approximately 21 days)
H
Key Function (KF)/Multifunction (MF) Registration
Installation
Each system must have one CPUI( )-U( ) ETU in the CPU/EXP slot of the basic B64-U20 KSU.
Refer to Figure 2-1 CPUI( )-U( ) ETU.
If the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU is installed in slots S1~S8, it will be damaged!
Figure 2-1 CPUI( )-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
2 - 3
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 2-1 CPUI( )-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings.
Table 2-1 CPUI( )-U( ) ETU Default Switch Settings
SW1-1
SW1-2
Description
Off
Off
Normal Operation
On
Off
Flash ROM load from COM1 port
Off
On
Factory Test
On
On
Flash ROM load from EPROM
SW1-3
Description
Off
MF Mode
On
KF Mode
SW2
Description
Momentary
System Reset
Switch
SW3-1
Description
On
System boot by EPROM
Off
System boot by Flash ROM
SW3-2
Description
N/A
Not Used
Pressing SW2 interrupts all service and causes a second initialization. Use
this switch only as a last resort.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 4
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Connectors
Before programming System Data, the battery must be connected to CN4 to allow memory
retention if a power failure or brownout occurs. When a brownout or power failure does occur,
and the battery backup circuit is not activated, System Data resets to the default values, all
stations in the system reset to the default values, and all data programmed on individual stations
is cleared.
When a CPUI( )-U( ) ETU is installed in the system, the clock/calendar must be set. This also
applies when battery backup fails for any reason.
When CPUI( )-U( ) ETU is removed for long term storage, disconnect the battery from CN4. This
prevents the battery from discharging completely. The fully charged battery retains memory for
approximately 21 days.
The CPUI( )-U( ) ETU has the following connectors:
J
CN1
Connects to the backboard
J
CN2
Connects to the ISA-bus
J
CN3
Connects to CN2 on the EXP-U( ) ETU using the expansion cable
J
CN4
Connects to the memory backup battery using the battery cable (factory installed)
J
CN5
Connects to CN1 of the CLKG-U( ) Unit
J
CN6
Connects to CN2 of the CLKG-U( ) Unit
LED Indications
Table 2-2 CPUI( )-U( ) ETU LED Indications
LED
Description
On
Flashing
Off
Operation stopped (Power
Normal
LIVE
CPU status
No Power
On)
Operation
LED2
Power status
System Power On
Not Used
System Power Off
Replacing Memory Backup
The CPUI( )-U( ) ETU provides memory backup for approximately 21 days. The Ni-Cad battery
should be replaced about every two years.
1.
Remove the battery cable from CPUI( )-U( ) ETU CN4. Refer to Figure 2-1 CPUI( )-U( )
ETU.
2.
Connect the cable from the new battery to CN4 on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU.
3.
Turn off the KSU power.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
2 - 5
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Remove the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU from the slot in the KSU.
5.
Use a suitable cutting tool to cut the tie wrap and remove the old battery.
6.
Fasten the new battery with a tie wrap.
7.
Install the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU again.
8.
Turn on the KSU power.
1.3
PKU 192-U (Port Key Unit)
The Port Key Unit allows the system to be configured as an Expanded Port Package. When the
PKU 192-U is not installed, the system is configured as a Basic Port Package; when it is
installed, the system is configured as an Expanded Port Package.
The PKU 192-U is installed in the IC30 socket.
Table 2-3 PKU 192-U Configuration
Basic Port
Expanded Port
Description
Package
Package
Basic Terminals (Telephones)
32
120 ,
Shared Call Arrival (CAR) Keys with Basic Terminals
24
112
Dedicated Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
40
0
Basic Terminals + Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
72
120
Basic Trunks
16
64
Universal Slots
24
24
Shared MIF Slots with Universal Slots
2
2
Dedicated MIF Slot
1
1
, Basic Terminals includes Wireless (PSII) and Voice Mail stations.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 6
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.4
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
Description
The ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU is the basic Electronic Station Interface ETU that provides an 8-channel
interface for Multiline Terminals, Attendant Consoles, Single Line Telephone Adapter SLT(1)-U( )
ADP, and DBM(B)-U( ) Box. This ETU can be expanded to 16 channels by installing the ESIE(8)-
U( ) ETU.
Figure 2-2 ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
Installation
A maximum of eight ESIB(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots S1~S8 in any system KSU.
Refer to KSU Power-Based ETU Quantity Limitations in Features and Specifications for
Universal Slots.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
2 - 7
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Switch Settings
SW1 resets the ETU.
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
H
Blinking Red
Normal Operation
H
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power On)
H
Off
No Power
LED1 indications are listed below.
H
Steady Red
Some port(s) busy
H
Off
All ports idle
Connectors
The ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU has three connectors:
H
CN1
Connects to the backboard
H
EXCN1
Connects to EXCN1 on the ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
H
EXCN2
Connects to EXCN1 on the ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
Connections
BK
RD
To
MDF
GN
To Telephone
YL
RJ-11
Figure 2-3 ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU Connection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 8
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.5
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
Description
The ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU is the expansion Electronic Station Interface ETU that provides an
additional 8-channel interface for Multiline Terminals, Attendant Consoles, Single Line Telephone
Adapter SLT(1)-U10 ADP, and DBM(B)-U10 Box. This expansion ESI ETU is piggybacked on the
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Figure 2-4 ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
2 - 9
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Installation
A maximum of five ESIE(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in slots S1~S8 in any system KSU.
Refer to KSU Power-Based ETU Quantity Limitations in Features and Specifications for
Universal Slots.
Connectors
The ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU has four connectors:
H
EXCN1
Connects to EXCN1 on the ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
H
EXCN2
Connects to EXCN1 on the ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
H
MJ1
Connects to MDF (eight ESI ports)
H
MJ2
Connects to MDF (eight ESI ports)
Connections
BK
RD
To
MDF
GN
To Telephone
YL
RJ-11
Figure 2-5 ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU Connection
Pin Assignments
The following pin assignments are used to connect eight Multiline Terminals to the ESIE(8)-U( )
ETU.
Table 2-4 ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU Pin Assignments
MJ1 Pin
Signal
Signal Name
Pin Color
1
T4
CH3Tip
WHTBLU
2
T3
CH2Tip
BLUWHT
3
T2
CH1Tip
WHTORN
4
R1
CH0Ring
ORNWHT
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 10
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2-4 ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU Pin Assignments (Continued)
MJ1 Pin
Signal
Signal Name
Pin Color
5
T1
CH0Tip
WHTGRN
6
R2
CH1Ring
GRNWHT
7
R3
CH2Ring
WHTBRN
8
R4
CH3Ring
BRNWHT
MJ2 Pin
Signal
Signal Name
Pin Color
1
T8
CH7Tip
WHTBLU
2
T7
CH6Tip
BLUWHT
3
T6
CH5Tip
WHTORN
4
R5
CH4Ring
ORNWHT
5
T5
CH4Tip
WHTGRN
6
R6
CH5Ring
GRNWHT
7
R7
CH6Ring
WHTBRN
8
R8
CH7Ring
BRNWHT
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
2 - 11
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 12
Electra Elite IPK
Features and Specifications
Features and Specifications for
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Attendant Transfer
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Attendant Transfer permits efficient call transfers in the system using an Attendant Multiline Terminal
equipped with one to four Attendant Add-On Console(s). Transferred calls can be voice announced,
camped-on (when the station is busy), or directly transferred to ring at stations. After a programmed
time, All unanswered transferred calls return to the Attendant with distinct audible and visual indications.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Any display Multiline Terminal programmed as an Attendant Position
Required Components:
DCR-60-1/DCU-60-1 Console
OPERATING PROCEDURES
From the Attendant Position with a CO/PBX call in progress:
1.
Press the DSS key on the Attendant Add-On Console or the Attendant Position for the desired
station.
2.
Wait for ringback tone or voice announcement.
G
3.
Press
on the Attendant Add-On Console or on the Attendant Position. The call is
transferred.
4.
Hang up.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 1
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.
After time-out, when the transferred call is not answered, a recall tone is received at the Attendant
Position; and the LED on the assigned CO/PBX line key or Call Appearance Key returns to flashing
green.
6.
Press the CO/PBX line key with the flashing green LED to return to the call.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When a Transfer/Camp-On is denied, the call remains on hold at the Attendant Position Multiline
Terminal.
H
The outside line key LED flashes green on the station receiving the Transfer/Camp-On, when the
line appears on that station. The Large LED also flashes green and the LED or the ANS key
flashes red.
H
An Attendant trying to Transfer/Camp-On a call to a station may be denied, when the Multiline
Terminal is busy and receiving Tone Override.
H
Use Memory Block 4-66 (MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection) to assign MOH or Ring Back
Tone for the outside party when a trunk call is placed on hold by the Transfer key on a
Dterm, hook flash from a Single Line Telephone, or the Transfer or Hold keys at a PSII
station.
Related Features List
Feature
Feature Name
Number
A-11
Attendant Add-On Console
A-12
Attendant Camp-On
A-25
Automatic Release
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 2
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-
Page-
Shortcut
Line Key
Line Key
¦+BTS , System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
1-1-11
¦+BTS
CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection
1-1-13
¦+BTS
CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection
1-1-14
¦
Attendant Add-On Console Transfer/
1-1-64
+BM
Camp-On Recall Time Selection
¦
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement
1-4-17
+AU
Hold Tone Selection
¦+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
¦
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection
1-8-08
4-2
+BTS
2
¦+BTT
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
4-66
, When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 3
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Authorization Code (New Feature)
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Authorization Code permits a station to dial outside numbers that would otherwise be restricted. When
an access code plus Authorization Code is dialed, the station's code restriction class will temporarily
change to allow calls if permitted by a new code restriction class.
The Authorization Code can be verified or unverified based on class of service and are assigned in the
Forced/Verified Account Code table (these share the same table).
The Authorization/Account Code is part of the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All stations
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To enter Forced Account Code/Authorization Code from any station:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
. .
2.
Dial Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Access Code (not set at default).
3.
Dial the Account Code.
4.
Dial the trunk access code and the outside number.
To program Forced Account Code/Authorization Code from Attendant position:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
.
2.
Dial Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Programming Access Code (not set at default).
3.
Dial the Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Number (001~500).
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 4
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Dial the Account Code (default: 10 digits).
G
5.
Press
to enter the information. The next Account Number is displayed. Repeat steps 4~5
until all desired Account Codes are entered.
E
6.
Press
to stop entering Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General
H
Memory Block 1-8-08 (Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2), Page 5, LK 1 is used to
activate assign Verified or Unverified for the Forced Account Code/Authorization Code features.
H
Memory Block 1-8-08 (Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2), Page 6, LK 3 is used to
activate assign Verified or Unverified for the Forced Account Code/Authorization Code features.
H
When a call is made without using an authorization code, memory blocks 4-64 and 4-65 are used
to assign the code restriction class.
H
When a call is mode using an authorization code, the code restriction class is temporarily changed
and Memory Blocks 4-07 and 4-08 are used to assign the code restriction class.
H
After placing a call using an authorization code, if the Recall or Drop keys are used, the temporary
code restriction class remains with the setting assigned in Memory Blocks 4-07 and 4-08 allowing
the user to dial another non-restricted number.
H
After placing a call using an authorization code, when the station goes idle (On-hook), the code
restriction class is reset to its previous setting assigned in Memory Blocks 4-64 and 4-65.
H
A total of 500 Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes can be entered system-wide.
H
Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes and Account Code entries Codes are printed on the
SMDR report, if both are used.
H
The letter A is placed in front of the Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes on the SMDR
reports to distinguish them from other Account Code entries.
H
When the Interdigit time (default is 10 seconds) expires during the user input of a Forced Account
Codes/Authorization Code, Busy Tone is generated.
H
PBR Time values apply when a Single line Telephone is used to enter a Forced Account Code/
Authorization Code.
H
Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes can be uploaded, downloaded, or modified using
PC-based System Programming.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 5
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions
H
A Forced Account Code/Authorization Code has a maximum of 13 digits.
H
The Authorization Code feature is only provided from intercom dial tone. Direct access to trunks is
bypassed by pressing CO Line Keys.
H
Existing restrictions (permitted by the temporary change to code restriction class) and Least Cost
Routing (LCR) assignments are applied after Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes are
entered.
H
When a 911 call is placed, Forced Account Code/Authorization Code is overridden by the
following:
J
Emergency 911 Cut-Through is enabled.
J
Enhanced 911 (CAMA Trunk) is installed and enabled.
H
Verified and Unverified Forced Account Code/Authorization Code cannot be used in the same
Class of Service.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
A-2
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified
C-19
Code Restriction
S-15
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 6
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-
Page-
Shortcut
Line Key
Line Key
¦
, Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
146, 147
+BA
48
¦
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
1-8-07
2-8
+BTS
Selection 1
¦+BTS , Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 1-8-08
5-1, 6-3
¦
, Station to Class of Service Feature
4-17
+BTT
Assignment
¦
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day
4-07
+BTT
Mode)
¦
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night
4-08
+BTT
Mode)
¦
, Code Restriction Class (without Authorization
4-64
+BTT
Code) Day Mode Assignment
¦
, Code Restriction Class (without Authorization
4-65
+BTT
Code) Night Mode Assignment
¦+BF
Forced Account Code Length Assignment
1-8-27
¦+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
¦+BA
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
7-3-02
¦+BS
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-01
¦+AS
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-13
¦+AS
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-14
¦+AS
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-5-26
¦+AS
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-25
¦+AS
SMDR Print Format
1-5-02
¦+AS
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
4-56
¦+CSS
Com Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
1-8-35
¦+BM
Start Time Selection
1-1-05
¦+AW
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
, When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 7
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Call Arrival (CAR) keys are available software extensions as part of 120 station numbers on the
Expanded Port Package. The Basic Port Package provides 32 station numbers and 40 CAR ports.
A Call Arrival extension assigned to a line key, can appear and ring on an individual station or multiple
stations. When a call is directed to a CAR, any station with the CAR can answer. This ensures that every
call to that group is answered promptly. Multiline Terminals may have several CAR extension
appearances depending on the application.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To answer an incoming outside call to the Call Arrival key on an outside or internal line call with Off-Hook
Ringing assigned:
1.
Receive off-hook ringing.
2.
Press CAR key. The first call is placed on hold, and the CAR is answered.
3.
The incoming call resides on a Call Appearance (CAP) key, or CO Line key when it is assigned on
the telephone.
To answer an incoming outside line call to the Call Arrival key on an internal call with Ringing Line
Preference:
1.
Go on-hook on an internal call.
2.
Go off-hook to answer incoming outside line call to a CAR key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 8
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Incoming outside line calls can ring on a CAR. When the call is answered, it resides on a CAP (or
CO Line key). The CAR becomes idle for another incoming call or continues to flash when another
call is waiting to be answered. When a Call Appearance key (or CO Line key) is unavailable, an
outside line call to a Call Arrival key cannot be answered.
H
Incoming internal calls to a Call Arrival key can be answered without using a Call Appearance key.
The ICM lamp (when provided) indicates a call, and when the call is put on hold, flashes at the
Conference key.
H
Go off-hook, press the Speaker key when Ringing Line Preference is assigned, press the flashing
Call Arrival key, or press the Answer key to answer Calls ringing at a Call Arrival key.
H
Call Arrival Keys can be set for Call Forward - All Call and Call Forward - Busy/No Answer.
H
Call Arrival keys can be set for Call Forward Off - Premise.
H
Off-Hook Ringing can be provided for calls ringing into CAR keys.
H
CAR keys can be assigned as a station hunting master number and/or as a member of a Station
Hunt group.
H
A BLF indication is provided on an Attendant Add-On Console for incoming calls.
H
A CAR key can be called using a DSS key from an Attendant Add-On Console or a DSS key at a
Multiline station.
H
An internal call to a CAR key is ring only. Voice announce is not available.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 9
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
The Electra Elite IPK Expanded Port Package system can provide 112 Call Arrival keys. This
number is shared with 120 station ports.
H
The Electra Elite IPK Basic Port Package system can contain 64 Call Arrival keys. This number
includes 40 dedicated CAR key ports and 24 Shared with station ports. When 64 CAR keys are
assigned, eight port numbers can be assigned for hardware extension numbers.
H
Two software packages (Basic Port Package and Expanded Port Package) are available for
the Electra Electra Elite IPK system using the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU. Refer to the following table
for maximum system capacities for each software package.
Basic Port
Expanded Port
Item
Notes
Package
Package
Basic Terminals (Phones)
32
120
Shared Call Arrival (CAR) Keys with Basic Terminals
24
112
Dedicated Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
40
0
Basic Terminals + Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
72
120
Basic Trunks
16
64
Universal Slot
24
24
Shared MIF Slots with Universal Slots
2
2
Dedicated MIF Slot
1
1
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
C-2
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 10
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-
Page-Line
Shortcut
Line Key
Key
¦+BK
, Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-04
¦
Access Code (1- or 2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
001
+BA
48
¦+BS
, Station Number Assignment
4-10
¦+BTM , Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
¦
, Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
4-37
+BTM
Mode)
¦
, Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night 4-38
+BTM
Mode)
¦+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
1-6-05
¦+BTM
SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference Selection
4-41
¦
Station to Call Appearance Block
4-43
+BTT
Assignment
, When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 11
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Analog Caller ID can display the calling party name and telephone number or name on the LCD of the
Multiline Terminal for incoming calls. For normal incoming calls (Day or Night Ring Assignment), up to
16 Multiline Display Terminals can display the Caller ID for the incoming analog trunk. For Direct Inward
Termination (DIT) calls, the Caller ID information is displayed at the terminating station. After the CO
call is answered, the Caller ID information follows if the call is transferred.
When the MIFM-U( ) ETU with KMM(1.0)U is installed, the Caller ID information can be displayed for the
last 50 incoming calls by using the Caller ID Scroll key, if assigned.
MIFM-U10 firmware V5.00 is required for 50 Caller ID scroll buffers. With lower-level firmware, 10
Caller ID scroll buffers are provided.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals with an LCD
Required Components:
COID(4)-U( ) ETU, COID(8)-U( ) ETU, COIB(4)-U( ) ETU (in COID mode), COIB(8)-U( ) ETU (in COID
mode)
MIFM-U( ) ETU with KMM(1.00)U installed when Caller ID Scrolling and Call Return is desired.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To display a stored Caller ID using the Scroll Key:
Press the DIR key or Scroll key to display the most recent saved ID. Repeatedly press the Scroll key to
display additional Caller ID names/numbers. (A maximum of 50 Caller ID names/numbers can be
displayed.)
The Scroll key is programmed using Memory Block 4-12 (Line Key Selection for the Telephone Mode). Refer
to the Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual for instructions.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 12
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
To return a call to the number displayed on the LCD using the Scroll Key
Press the Scroll Key until the desired number to be called back is displayed. While the number is
displayed, go off hook. The system automatically accesses an outside line and dials the displayed
number.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
H
COID(4)/(8)-U( ) ETUs, COIB(4)-U( ) ETU (in COID mode), or COIB(8)-U( ) ETU (in COID
mode) can be installed in any Interface Slot (1~8) of any cabinet (1~3).
H
The DIR key provided with the Electra Elite IPK Terminals performs the same function as
the Caller ID Scroll Key.
H
When the CO line key is flashing red (Incoming CO call), the user can press Feature + LK to
display Caller ID even when Caller ID is not normally displayed.
H
When the telephone company sends the caller name and number, the name or the number (or
both) is displayed on the LCD while the Multiline Terminal is ringing. When the telephone company
sends the caller number only, it is displayed on the top line of the LCD while the Multiline Terminal
is ringing.
H
A maximum of 15 Multiline Terminals can be assigned to display Caller ID for normal incoming CO
calls system-wide. A sixteenth Multiline Terminal can be assigned to display Caller ID for normal
incoming CO calls per CO line. These 16 Multiline Terminals constitute a Caller ID group. An
answered call can be transferred to any station in the system, and Caller ID is displayed at that
station.
H
Press the green line key where the CO call resides during a CO call, to verify the Caller ID. When
the telephone company provides both Name and Number (depending on the system assignment)
they are displayed for five seconds, followed by the remaining information.
H
When the station is assigned to receive DIT/ANA calls, Caller ID is displayed only on the Multiline
Terminal where DIT/ANA is assigned to ring. The Caller ID Indication follows the station Call
Forward setting or Station Hunting feature.
H
When a Multiline Terminal is busy, the Caller ID is displayed for an incoming call.
H
When a Multiline Terminal is set for Do Not Disturb, the Caller ID is displayed for incoming calls.
H
When a Multiline Terminal receives multiple incoming calls, the first Caller ID is displayed. After the
first call is answered, the second Caller ID is displayed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 13
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The Caller ID Indication disappears:
J
When an incoming call is answered.
J
When an internal or ring transfer call is received.
J
When Feature Access, DSS, Redial, or Feature key is pressed.
H
The Caller ID number is printed on the SMDR printout for incoming calls that are answered at
stations that can display Caller ID data. The name is not printed.
H
When a station is engaged in a voice over, whisper page, or broker's call, the station can display
Caller ID until the process ends.
H
When an incoming call is answered before Caller ID is sent, the Caller ID is not displayed.
H
The following incoming calls display Caller ID on a Multiline terminal:
J
Ordinary CO Calls
J
DIT/ANA calls
J
VRS/AA calls
J
Ring Transfer calls
J
CAR calls
J
ACD/UCD calls
J
Calls with delayed ringing
H
When a Multiline Terminal displays Caller ID with off hook ringing and receives another incoming
CO call, the Caller ID changes to the second caller.
H
When trunk name indication is assigned, the data in Memory Block 3-00 (Trunk Name/Number
Assignment) is displayed on the Multiline Terminal assigned for Caller ID indication even when a
terminal receives a caller name and number.
Scrolling Caller ID with Return Call
H
When the Scroll key is used, a maximum of 50 Caller IDs can be stored in System Memory.
When 50 Caller IDs are stored and an additional call is answered, the first Caller ID is erased from
System Memory. Press the Scroll key to display the stored Caller IDs. When you go Off-hook, the
displayed Caller ID is automatically dialed. The LCR or ARS feature is required for the Automatic
Dial Out option.
H
When Scroll key is not pressed in five seconds, the LCD returns to idle, and Caller ID disappears.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 14
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
When an outgoing call is made using the Scroll function, the call follows Code Restriction, Digit
Restriction, and Least Cost Routing (LCR) or Automatic Route Selection (ARS). The LCR or ARS
feature is required for the Scroll function to operate properly.
H
Caller ID data is not stored when the following conditions apply:
J
COIN
Caller ID is sent from a pay phone.
J
Out of Area
Data is sent from a CO that cannot process Caller ID data.
J
Private
Calling party disables Caller ID information for the called party.
J
Data Error
The data stream includes an error.
H
When Out of Area or Private characters are received, the MIFM-U10 ETU does not store them in
the Scroll Key buffer.
Restrictions:
H
SIE incoming calls do not support Caller ID Indication even when the Multiline Terminal is ringing.
H
The user can press the Feature key and then the flashing red CO line key (incoming CO call) to
display Caller ID.
H
Five users can access the Scroll function at the same time. IN USE is displayed on the Multiline
terminal of another user that tries to access it.
H
A maximum of 13 characters can be displayed on the LCD for Caller ID Name/Number.
H
Caller ID scrolling and automatic dial out features require installation of the MIFM-U10 ETU with
attached KMM(1.0)U.
H
When a call transferred to a station goes unanswered and is transferred again, Caller ID
information is not stored in the scrolling bin at that station.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
A-23
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) on T-1
A-26
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
C-17
Class of Service
E-6
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
I-6
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections
I-7
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 15
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Feature
Feature Name
Number
L-3
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
S-15
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
U4
Universal Slots
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Functio
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Block
n
Page-
Page-
Shortcut
Line Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
¦+BS
MIF (ANI/Caller ID) Assignment
7-3-04
¦
Caller ID Display Assignment for System
1-1-78
+AI
Mode
¦
, Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
4-3, 4-4,
+BTS
5-7, 6-5
¦+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
¦+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
¦+AI
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX Line
3-44
¦+AI
Caller Name Indication Selection
3-53
¦+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
¦+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
¦+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
¦
Station to Class of Service Feature
4-17
+BTT
Assignment
¦
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
4-37
+BTM
Mode)
¦
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
4-38
+BTM
Mode)
¦+AI
Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO Selection
4-44
¦+AI
Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment
4-49
, When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 16
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Electra Elite IPK Terminals are designed to provide ergonomic form and user-friendly functions.
With advanced digital circuitry, the IPK Dterm consists of distinct models to meet user diverse telephone
terminal needs.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
DTH-16LD-1 TEL
DTH-32D-1 TEL
DTH-16D-1 TEL
DTH-8D-1 TEL
DTH-8-1 TEL
DCR-60-1 CONSOLE
(IP) ITH-16D-2 TEL
ITH-8D-2 TEL
Required Components:
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
(IP) IPD(4/8)-U( ) ETU (for IP Terminals)
Optional Components:
AD(A)-R UNIT (Adapter for Call Recording)
AP(A)-R UNIT (Analog Port Adapter [without Ringer])
AP(R)-R UNIT (Analog Port Adapter [with Ringer])
CT(A)-R UNIT (TAPI Adapter connect by RS-232C)
CT(U)-R UNIT (TAPI Adapter connect by USB)
IP-R(IPK) UNIT (IP Adapter)
BS(ACD)-R UNIT (ACD Button Unit)
BS(F)-R UNIT (French Button Unit)
BS(S)-R UNIT (Spanish Button Unit)
WM-R UNIT (Wall Mount Unit)
AC-R UNIT (AC Adapter)
(IP) AD(A)-2R UNIT (Adapter for Call Recording)
PS(A)-R UNIT (Power Failure unit for IP Phone)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 17
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to individual feature for details.
Specifications
DTH-16LD-1
DTH-32D-1
DTH-16D-1
DTH-8D-1
DTH-8-1
ITH-16D-2
ITH-8D-2
Dedicated Function Keys
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
Line/Feature Access/
Programmable Feature
16
32*
16
8
8
16
8
Access Key
LCD (3x24)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Call/Message Indicator
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Adjustable Base
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Built-in Wall Mount
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Headset Jack (Built-in)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DESI Label by LCD
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Receiver Volume Control for:
Handset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Speakerphone
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Headset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ring Volume Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LCD Contrast Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Housing Color
White or
White or
White or
White or
White or
White or
White or
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Soft Keys
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
* A maximum of 24 keys may be programmed as Line Keys.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 18
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General
H
The Electra Elite IPK Terminals with an adjustable display offer soft key operation. The LCD panel
has three lines of display, each with 24 characters. Standard features include headset jacks, wall
mount units, and adjustable-base units.
H
The Electra Elite IPK Terminals support dedicated function keys to provide easy one-touch access
to the most common telephone operations. These keys include: Feature, Recall, Conference,
Redial, Hold, Transfer, Answer, Speaker, Microphone, Directory, and Message.
H
The dial pad is detachable to allow easy customizing of a foreign language (French or Spanish), or
for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) applications.
H
All Electra Elite IPK Terminals are Class B devices and comply with U.S. FCC regulations for office
and residential use. They also comply with requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulations.
H
With the DTH-16LD-1 TEL, the 16-Line Keys are labeled by the LCD by assignment in system
data. The LCD also supports the LED status for trunks, Call Appearance Keys (CAP), DSS/BLF
keys, and select Feature keys/Feature Access keys.
H
Use Memory Block 4-68 (Line Key Name Assignment) to assign names to each LCD Line
Key of the DTH/DTR-16D-1 Telephone. Up to eight characters can be assigned.
H
The LCD of the Electra Elite IPK Terminals provide a volume bar indication, while adjusting the
following volume levels or controls:
J
Speaker Volume
J
Handset/Headset Volume
J
BGM Volume
J
Ring Volume/Off Hook Ring Volume
J
LCD Contrast
H
The MIC Key controls the built-in microphone during speakerphone mode and controls the handset
mute feature during handset/headset operation.
H
The DIR Key performs the same function as the Caller ID Scroll Key.
H
The MSG Key performs the function of Quick Transfer to Voice Mail (VM), and acts as a VM
access key to call the VM pilot number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 19
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions
H
For compatibility of Adapter Units and Terminals, refer to the following table:
Terminal
Adapter Unit
DTH-16LD-1
DTH-16LD-1
DTH-16D-1
DTH-8D-1
DTH-8-1
ITH-16D-2
ITH-8D-2
AD(A)-R
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
AP(A)-R
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
AP(R)-R
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
CT(A)-R
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
CT(U)-R
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
Button Units
BS(ACD)-R( ) UNIT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
BS(F)-R( ) UNIT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
BS(S)-R( ) UNIT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Other
WM-R UNIT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AC-R UNIT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
IP Telephone Adapters
AD(A)-2R UNIT
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
PS(A)-R UNIT
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X = Comparable
- = Not comparable
H
With non-IP Electra Elite IPK Terminals, up to two adapters can be installed in a phone. For
compatibility of multiple adapter units, refer to the following table.
AD(A)-R
AP(A)-R
AP(R)-R
CT(A)-R
CT(U)-R
IP-R(IPK)
AD(A)-R
X
X
X
X
-
AP(A)-R
X
-
X
X *1
-
AP(R)-R
X
-
X
X *1
-
CT(A)-R
X
X
X
-
-
CT(U)-R
X
X *1
X *1
-
-
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 20
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
IP-R(IPK)
-
-
-
-
-
X = Compatible
- = Not compatible
*1 = The Voice Application of CT(U) cannot be used when installed with AP(A/R)-R UNIT.
H
With Electra Elite IPK IP Terminals, only one adapter (the AD(A)-2R UNIT or PS(A)-R UNIT) can
be installed in a phone.
H
The AC-R UNIT (AC Adapter) is required when any of the following adapters are installed in a
Dterm IPK Terminal:
J
AP(R)-R
J
CT(U)-R
J
IPR-R UNIT (if in-line power, power over Ethernet, is not provided)
J
DCR-60-1 Console
H
The AC-R UNIT (AC Adapter) is required for the ITH-16D-2 and ITH-8D-2 telephones if in-line
power, power over Ethernet, is not provided.
H
The WM-R UNIT (Wall Mount Unit) is required when any adapter is installed in an Electra Elite IPK
Terminal and the terminal is to be wall mounted.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
A-7
Ancillary Device Connection
E-7
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
E-2
Electronic Volume Control
F-6
Full Duplex Handsfree
F-8
Full Handsfree Operation
H-3
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring
O-1
Off-Hook Ringing
S-9
Softkeys
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 21
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-
Page-
Shortcut
Line Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
¦+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
¦+BTM
Multiline Terminal Type Selection
4-50
¦+BTM
LCD Line Key Name Assignment
4-68
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 22
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Electra Elite Terminal Migration allows an Electra Elite IPK customer to protect their investment in
terminals when purchasing Electra Elite IPK systems. Electra Elite Multiline Terminals can be easily
used with the Electra Elite IPK systems. With very few exceptions, all terminal features and abilities that
are possible on Electra Elite 48/192 are also possible with the Electra Elite IPK system.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Electra Elite multiline Terminals
Required Components:
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
ESIE(8)-U( ) UNIT
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to individual feature for details.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 23
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Restrictions
H
Dedicated Function Keys for Microphone, Directory, and Message are not provided with Electra
Elite Multiline Terminals.
H
The Full Duplex handsfree feature is only supported by the Electra Elite Terminals with an HFU-U
Unit installed.
H
Electra Professional Multiline Terminals are not supported by the Electra Elite IPK system.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
A-7
Ancillary Device Connection
E-6
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
E-2
Electronic Volume Control
F-6
Full Duplex Handsfree
F-8
Full Handsfree Operation
H-3
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring
O-1
Off-Hook Ringing
S-9
Softkeys
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 24
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-
Page-
Shortcut
Line Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
¦+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
¦+BTM
Multiline Terminal Type Selection
4-50
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 25
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electronic Volume Control
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Electronic Volume Control is provided on all Multiline Terminals to allow easy changes to the LCD
contrast on Multiline Display Terminals, Off-Hook Ringing volume, Station Ringing volume, and Handset/
Station Speaker volume.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To change the LCD contrast for Multiline Display Terminals:
E
1.
Press
to go off-hook.
2.
Dial default Access Code FK.
3.
Dial B from the dial pad.
4.
PressM to adjust LCD contrast (^ to increase or v to decrease).
5.
Go on-hook.
- OR -
While the station is idle, pressM to adjust LCD contrast (^ to increase or v to decrease).
To change the off-hook ringing volume:
1.
Go off-hook with the handset.
2.
Dial default Access CodeFK.
3.
Dial A from the dial pad.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 26
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
PressM to control off-hook ringing volume (^ to increase or v to decrease).
5.
Go on-hook.
To change the station ringing volume:
E
H
Press
to go off-hook.
6.
Dial default Access CodeFK.
7.
Dial A from the dial pad.
8.
Press M while the station is ringing to control ringing volume (^ to increase or v to decrease).
9.
Go on-hook.
To set the handset receiver volume:
1.
Go off-hook with the handset.
2.
PressM to control handset receiver volume (^ to increase or v to decrease).
To set the speaker volume:
E
1.
Press
to go off-hook.
2.
PressM to control speaker volume (^ to increase or v to decrease).
3.
Go on-hook.
- OR -
While using the speakerphone, pressM to adjust the volume (^ to increase or v to decrease).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Multiline Terminal users can further increase station volume by pressing Feature + 2 during internal
calls.
H
LCD contrast, off-hook ringing volume, station ringing volume, and speaker volume adjustments
are saved in system memory.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 27
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The LCD of Electra Elite IPK Terminals provides a volume bar indication while adjusting the
following volumes or controls:
J
Speaker Volume
J
Handset/Headset Volume
J
BGM Volume
J
Ring Volume/Off Hook Ring Volume
J
LCD Contrast
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
E-6
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
E-7
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
F-8
Full Handsfree Operation
H-3
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring
O1
Off-Hook Ringing
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-
Page-
Shortcut
Line Key
Line Key
¦
, Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
049
+BTT
48
¦+BTT
Receiving Volume Selection
4-92
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 28
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Elite ACD Plus
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Elite ACD Plus is an Automatic Call Distribution ETU that supports up to 40 agents and 12 supervisors.
This feature allows any incoming DIT, ANA, DID, or CO Ring Transfer call to terminate at a prearranged
ACD Group of agents. The incoming call is either distributed to the agent that has been idle the longest
or in accordance with a programmed preference level. Operation includes Automatic Attendant (AA),
ACD only, or both AA and ACD.
The Administration Program uses a Local Area Network (LAN) that allows one administrator and up to
five remote PCs, depending on site license, to monitor ACD statistics and generate reports.
An agent or supervisor can be an active member in up to four ACD Groups and can be logged on and
receive calls from all four groups.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Electra Elite IPK or Dterm Series i Multiline Terminals with softkeys
- OR -
Electra Elite or Dterm Series E Multiline Terminals with softkeys
Required Components:
ACD(8)-U( ) ETU
MIFM-U( ) ETU (for PC Programming during setup)
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to Automatic Call Distribution Manual:
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 29
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
CALL PROCESSING
DESCRIPTION
Abandoned Call Search
Abandoned incoming calls are not connected to agent positions. The system removes them from the
queue on trunks that provide calling party disconnect supervision.
Call Distribution to Agents
Two methods can be used:
H
Longest Idle
Calls are automatically and uniformly distributed to the agent in an ACD Group that has been idle
the longest. When incoming calls are holding the oldest call is connected to the first available
agent.
H
Preferred
Calls are automatically distributed among idle agents according to an assigned priority level of 1
(first) to 9 (last) When agents have the same priority, the system connects the call to the longest
idle agent in that priority.
Call Transfer to ACD Group Queue
CO Trunk calls that terminate to a normal station, ACD agent, or supervisor can be transferred to an
ACD Group Queue.
Night Service
The administration program assigns ACD Groups to follow or ignore night mode. When an ACD Group
is in night mode, the system can route incoming ACD calls to an Internal Station/Attendant or Night
Announcement, or perform a Centrex Transfer.
Overflow
When all agents are busy, and calls have been held in queue for more than a specified time, overflow
allows calls to be directed to an assigned station, Station Hunt Group, another ACD Plus queue, or Off-
site using Centrex Transfer.
Queuing
All incoming calls for ACD Groups are placed in queue when no agent is available. A queue provides
first in-first out sequence for call processing.
Pilot Numbers
A system programmed pilot number is the entry point for calls to an ACD Group. A pilot number
corresponds to a Call Arrival key appearance in the Electra Elite system. Each queue has an individual
CAR key. Do not program An ACD Group Pilot Number in a station hunt group because Station Hunt
has priority over ACD.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 30
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
PC Programming (SAT) is required to assign One-Touch keys on the ports of the ACD(8)-U( ) ETU
during installation and/or adding or removing phones to be used by Agents.
H
When using Memory Block 4-10 (Station Number Assignment) with ACD Plus running, and any
data is written using the transfer key, all ACD agents are logged out.
H
ACD Plus resets when System Refresh is performed, and all ACD Agents are logged out.
H
Calls are answered first in-first out.
H
Calls are distributed to the longest-idle agent or according to the priority level assigned to an agent.
H
Elite ACD Plus can be programmed per Queue to follow or ignore night mode.
H
Maximum programming assignments for ACD Groups and Agents are listed below:
J
120 Agents per system (No supervisors
J
12 Supervisors per system (108 Agents)
J
120 Agents can be assigned to one ACD Group
J
40 Agents and 12 Supervisors can be logged in at the same time
J
Four ACD Groups per system
Restrictions:
H
For Multiline Terminals system wide, direct trunk appearances of CO lines that are handled by ACD
Plus are not supported. Multiline Terminals must have Call Appearance (CAP) keys assigned to
handle ACD Plus Calls.
H
Only 40 agents and 12 supervisors can be logged on at the same time to any or all of the ACD
queues, depending on programming.
H
When the agent in the ACD Group where a call terminates does not answer after a programmed
number of rings, the call is put back in the queue and goes to the next available agent or follows
overflow.
H
Only one system administrator can be connected to the server anytime.
H
Up to five remote monitors can be connected to the server at the same time.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 31
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Conditions:
H
The Flash ACD hardware connects to the Electra Elite through ports recognized by the KSU as
Digital Voice Mail ports. Eight ACD ports are supported.
H
Voice Prompts and firmware are stored in Flash Memory on the Elite ACD(8)-U( ) ETU.
H
If a K-CCIS trunk is on hold, the Specified Line Seizure access codes can be used to retrieve the
call from its held state.
H
The Elite ACD Plus can support and distribute incoming calls from a remote K-CCIS office.
AGENT AND SUPERVISOR FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
Assistance
During an ACD call, An agent can press a programmed Feature Access or One-touch key to
automatically place the active call on hold and call the supervisor for assistance.
Break Mode
The agent can use a softkey to take a position out of ACD Mode for a break from work without logging
off.
Wrap Mode
The agent can use a softkey to take a momentary break to process the previous call. This allows the
agent to finish paper work and discuss the call with a supervisor.
Logon/Logoff
An agent can logon by dialing the pilot number for the ACD port and following displayed prompts.
Operating statistics are collected until the agent performs logoff by pressing the logoff softkey on the
agent position.
Non-ACD Call
An agent or supervisors can receive a transferred call or a call directly from dial trunks ( e.g., Tie Line,
DID, or DIT). Transferred ACD calls from another agent or ACD calls on hold by another agent are
counted as non-ACD calls by MIS when they are picked up by agents in another Group.
Headset Answer/Release
An agent using a handset can press a programmed Headset On/Off Line Key to answer or release an
ACD call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 32
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Headset Volume Control
An agent can control the volume of the headset independently of the volume of the handset.
Control of Night Mode
The supervisor can activate or deactivate Night Mode using an NT key programmed on a Feature
Access or One-Touch key on the supervisor terminal. A supervisor can also place an individual queue in
night mode after logging on, using softkeys. Each queue can be set to follow or ignore night mode.
Monitoring (Barge-In)
The supervisor can monitor calls at an agent position using a key operation on the supervisor terminal.
The conference LED is on at each involved terminal during monitoring.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The LED for a Call Appearance key used to transfer a call to an ACD pilot number remains on until
the call is answered by the ACD(8)-U( ) ETU.
H
After the agent dials the ACD(8)-U( ) ETU, all agent functions are accessed using softkeys.
H
Any agent in an ACD Group can press their logoff key to busy out the station. The station user can
then originate calls or receive calls directed to the station number but not to the ACD Group
number.
Restrictions:
H
An agent can logoff or enter Break or Wrap mode only when the station is idle. The agent can
request these conditions by pressing the applicable softkey during an ACD call. The last entered
request is carried out when the telephone returns to idle.
H
An agent cannot receive another ACD call while an existing ACD call is on hold. After the held call
is terminated, the agent can then receive ACD calls.
H
Agents and supervisors must have a DTP/DTR/DTU terminal with softkeys.
H
Agent telephones always follow forwarding including ACD calls. The forwarding times must be
verified to ensure that they do not conflict with agent operation.
H
Incoming ACD calls cannot be received during Break or Wrap Mode.
Data Assignment:
H
A default alert tone is provided for Barge-In Monitoring. The tone can be disabled in system
programming.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 33
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT FUNCTION
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
For Centrex lines, the AA can transfer a call to any valid Centrex number using Centrex service.
After the call is transferred at the Central Office, it does not use any Electra Elite trunk lines.
H
Additional hardware is not required to support Automated Attendant.
Restrictions:
H
Supervisors can record AA and ACD queue messages again using the telephone. The maximum
message lasts 90 seconds.
H
Automated Attendant (AA) allows a caller to direct dial a valid extension defined by the
Administration application or one-key dialing only while a message is playing, when direct dial is
enabled.
H
When caller does not select an Automated Attendant transfer option after the AA message finishes
playing, the caller is automatically transferred to the default transfer number. When a default
transfer number is not assigned, the AA message replays.
H
Elite ACD Plus can be programmed to answer lines with AA while sending others directly to the
ACD queue.
The DIT assignment bypasses the Automatic Attendant function for any trunk.
ANNOUNCEMENTS FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
By default, all announcements except the AA and On-Hold message are recorded. Using the
Administration program, most messages can be allowed or denied per group. Both AA messages and
the Numbers in Queue messages are shared by all groups. The supervisor can login by telephone to
ACD and change any message when granted access rights for the group. Recordings can also be
changed using the Administration program by uploading a voice file in the correct format from the PC.
All prompts must be recorded or converted to 8KHz OKI ADPCM format.
The numbers prompt must be in BICOM Indexed Play File Format with silence compression in addition
to the requirement listed above.
Automated Attendant Messages
A standard greeting that is not recorded at default and an error message that plays when an invalid
selection is dialed are included. Both messages are shared by all groups.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 34
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
ACD Greeting Message
A caller hears the message that is recorded per group when agents are not available to answer a call.
The Administration program can set this message to play first even when available agents are idle.
Numbers in Queue Messages
These messages are shared by all groups, can be recorded by the Supervisor using a telephone, and
contain the numbers played for queue depth. During recording by telephone, the number to speak is
shown in the display. When a voice file from a PC is used, the message must be in indexed play format
or the queue depth feature does not work.
ACD On-Hold Message
This message (recorded and enabled per group) plays after the ACD Greeting and Refresh 1 and
Refresh 2 messages. By default this message is not recorded.
ACD Refresh Message 1
This message (recorded and enabled per group) plays at programmed intervals for callers that remain in
queue. It plays after the ACD Greeting and before ACD Refresh Message 2.
ACD Refresh Message 2
This message (recorded and enabled per group) plays at programmed intervals for callers that remain in
queue. It plays after the ACD Greeting, ACD Refresh Message 1, and On-Hold messages.
Night Message
This message (recorded and enabled per group) is played when a group is in night mode and the
message is enabled for that queue.
ACD Queue Status Header
This message (recorded and enabled per group) is used with the queue depth feature to indicate the
place in the queue. By default it states: "you are caller number" followed by the prompt that plays the
correct place for the caller.
ACD Queue Status Trailer
A message (in queue) that is recorded and enabled per group is played after the Queue status header
and Numbers Message.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When all agents in the ACD group where a call is terminated are busy, the call waits in queue until
an agent is available. The caller receives announcements, queue depth indication or Music on
Hold.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 35
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Each caller hears every announcement from the beginning.
H
When an agent becomes available, the caller is immediately connected even when an
announcement is in progress.
Restrictions:
H
The maximum time for any message is 90 seconds.
H
DIT/ANA, CO Ring transfers, AA transfers, or DID/Tie Line calls must be directed to an ACD pilot
number to receive announcements.
H
When all ACD ports are busy, the incoming caller continues to hear ringback tone or Music on Hold
until an ACD port is available.
H
Only seven calls can be connected to the ACD(8)-U( ) ETU and receive announcements at the
same time. Port 1 is reserved for agents to logon during heavy traffic. A maximum of 64 trunks
can be supported.
Data Assignment:
H
The answering time after the incoming CO/PBX call rings can be programmed per trunk when
using Automated Attendant.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
S-9
Softkeys
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 36
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
¦+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
¦+BK
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-04
¦+BA
Access Code (1-, 2-, 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46~48
063, 064
¦+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
6-5
¦+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
¦+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
¦+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
¦+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
¦+BS
Station Number Assignment
4-10
¦+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
¦+BTT
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
4-14
¦
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward
4-15
+BTT
Assignment
¦
Station to Class of Service Feature
4-17
+BTT
Assignment
¦
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
4-37
+BTM
Mode)
¦
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
4-38
+BTM
Mode)
¦+BTT
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
4-66
, When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 37
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me) allows up to three zones of External Zone Paging plus All Zone
External Paging. The user can locate personnel quickly using external paging. An external speaker can
be installed in a noisy area where a telephone would not be appropriate. All Zone External Paging
enables emergency announcements to be made to all areas quickly. The Meet-Me function allows the
paged party to respond quickly to the paged call.
With the Electra Elite IPK system, a single external paging zone output is built into and provided
with the basic B64-U20 KSU.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
ECR-U( ) ETU and a 1- or 2-way amplifier
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To originate using a Multiline Terminal:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Access CodeEE~EI (as set in default) for the required zone, or press the
programmed Feature Access or One-Touch key.
To answer using a Multiline Terminal:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Meet-Me Access Code (EJ, when the page is an Internal/External Page, or
EL, when the page is an External Page, as set in default), or press the programmed Feature
Access or One-Touch key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 38
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
To originate using a Single Line Telephones:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the desired Access Code EE~EI(as set in default) for the required zone.
To answer using a Single Line Telephones:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Meet-Me Access Code (EJ, when the page is an Internal/External Page, or
EL, when the page is only an External Page, as set in default).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Default Access Codes are:
All External Zones
55
External Zone A
56
External Zone B
57
External Zone C
58
All Internal/External Zones
59
Default Access Codes can be changed
during installation.
External Meet-Me
5#
Internal Meet-Me
5,
H
After a page is established and the Meet-Me code is dialed, the paging circuit is released and
another party may page.
H
A Multiline Terminal user can conference an outside line with an External Zone Page to allow a
conversation to be monitored by people within speaker range.
H
Talk Back Paging is supported.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 39
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
When an External Zone Page is in progress (either Zone A, B, C, or All Zone), no other station can
activate External Zone Paging until all zones become idle again.
H
The built-in single external paging zone output with the Electra Elite IPK, B64-U20 KSU, can
provide a pre-alert tone if assigned. The Chime control (4-Tone Chime) is not supported.
H
Only three external paging zones and All Zone external Paging are possible.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
B-1
Background Music Over External Speakers
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
¦
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46/47/
074 ~
+BA
48
079,
081
¦+BTD
Attendant Add-On Console Key Assignment
1-6-05
¦+BP
External Speaker Connection Selection
1-7-02
¦+BP
External Paging Alert Tone Selection
1-7-03
¦+BP
External Paging Timeout Selection
1-7-06
¦+BP
External Speaker Pre-Tone/Chime Selection
1-7-08
¦+BP
External Speaker Chime Start Time Selection
1-7-09
¦+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 40
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Full Duplex Handsfree
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The HFU-U Unit is an add-on device to the Electra Elite Multiline Terminals that provides a full duplex
speakerphone for small conference rooms. An external microphone is also provided that has a
push-to-mute control button that must be held down to turn the microphone off.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Electra Elite Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
The HFU-U Unit must be installed in each Electra Elite Multiline Terminal
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To use the HFU-U using an Electra Elite Multiline Terminal:
E
1.
Press
, and make an internal or external call.
2.
When muting is desired, press and hold down the Mute key on the external microphone.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
This full-duplex unit does not work as well as a conference-room-type speakerphone. The echo
cancellation works best in a smaller area (such as an office) with average acoustics. Large
environment areas with hard surfaces that tend to bounce sound have an adverse affect on the
speakerphone. The HFU-U Unit can be placed in half-duplex mode for these cases.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 41
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
A full Duplex Handsfree unit is not available for Electra Elite IPK Terminals. (DTH-( )-1 TEL)
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
A-7
Ancillary Device Connection
E-7
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BTM , HFU Selection
4-29
, When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 42
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Internal HUB
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
For data communications, a hub is a convergence point where data arrives from one or more directions
and is forwarded out in one or more other directions. A hub usually includes a switch (a switch could
usually be considered a hub as well). Data comes together at the hub, and the switch determines how
and where data is forwarded. When multiple ETUs requiring Ethernet data connections are installed in
an Electra Elite IPK KSU, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be installed to provide a relatively simple
installation.
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an in-skin fast Ethernet switching HUB unit that provides the following services:
Auto Negotiation for Port Configurations
This feature can allow or deny Auto Negotiation for port speed and duplex mode for each port. When
allowed, the HUB(8)-U () ETU negotiates with linked equipment to determine either a 10 Mbps or 100
Mbps speed and either Full or Half duplex operating mode.
Port Speed Selection
When Auto Negotiation is denied, data switching speed can be manually set to 10 or 100 Mbps for each
port.
Duplex Mode Selection
When Auto Negotiation is denied, Full or Half duplex can be manually set for each port.
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
Mode selection can be MDI, MDIX, or Auto Detection. When the mode is Auto Detection, the
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can automatically determine whether or not to crossover between pairs so that an
external crossover cable is not required. When Auto Negotiation is denied, Auto Detection cannot be
used. Either of the remaining selections must be used.
Port Mirroring
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an eight-port switching HUB. One port can be set as a source port and another
port can be set as a target port for port mirroring to monitor traffic data.
Quality of Service (QoS)
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can either be assigned as port-based Priority (packet received) or Tag-based
Priority. Unknown Unicast Packets are always set to Low priority. Received packets always follow the
assigned High or Low priority designation. This feature is disabled when NO is set.
Tag-based Priority is allowed only when the HUB(8)-U () ETU is set to Tag VLAN mode and Port-based
Priority Assignment is denied.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 43
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Priority Assignment for Received Packet
Memory Block 1-16-07 (High Priority RX Tag Selection) determines which priority field is assigned as
High. When a received packet contains a Tag (according to IEEEE 802.1q definition) the HUB(8)-U( )
ETU can assign a High priority based on this assignment. A tag can be from 0 (lowest) ~ 7 (highest).
Transmit Tag Priority Assignment
When the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU transmits a packet in VLAN mode, the priority can be assigned for each
packet that is transmitted by the following assignments:
Memory Block 1-16-08 (High Priority TX Tag Assignment) assigns the priority value for High priority
packets for each port.
Memory Block 1-16-09 (Low Priority TX Tag Assignment) assigns the priority value for Low priority
packets for each port.
Tag Mode Switching
When the destination is a Unicast address and the entry is found in the address table, the HUB(8)- U()
ETU acts accordingly.
When the port number is the same as the Port number where the packet is received, the packet is
discarded after it is received and checked for errors to update RMON counters.
When the port number is different, the packet is forwarded to the applicable local port. The Tag is
stripped or added according to the T-field entry in the Address table. The Tag is overwritten when the
received packet is priority tagged (i.e. Vid=0 in the tag) when forwarded on a tagged port.
When the destination is an unknown Unicast address, the HUB(8)-U () ETU uses the Vid of the packet
(either from packet tag or default of input port) to index to the VLAN table and forwards the packet to all
ports (except the source port) that are members of this VLAN. The Tag is stripped or added according to
the system data. The Tag is overwritten when the received packet is priority tagged (i.e. Vid=0 in the
tag) when forwarded on a tagged port.
When the destination is a Multilcast address, and the address entry is found, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU uses
the Vid to index to the VLAN table to retrieve the local ports where this packet should be forwarded. The
tag is removed, added, or changed by the system data setting.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 44
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
When Auto Negotiation is denied, and port speed is set to 100 Mbps, the LED on the RJ45
connector is on yellow. When port speed is set to 10 Mbps, the LED goes off.
Restrictions:
H
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
RELATED FEATURES LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
C-21
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI).
V-3
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-
Page-
Shortcut
Line Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Card interface Slot Assignment
7-1
¦+AB
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-00
¦+AB
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base-T
1-16-01
¦+AB
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-02
¦+AB
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-03
¦+AB
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-04
¦+AB
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-05
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 45
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-
Page-
Shortcut
Line Key
Line Key
¦+AB
Port based Priority Selection
1-16-06
¦+AB
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-07
¦+AB
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
¦+AB
Low Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
¦+AB
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-10
¦+AB
Mirror Source Port Assignment
1-16-11
¦+AB
Mirror Target Port Assignment
1-16-12
¦+AB
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-13
¦+AB
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-14
¦+AB
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-15
¦+AB
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-16
¦+AB
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
1-16-17
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 46
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Integrated Service Digital Network - Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-BRI) is a Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN) service that provides two B channels and a D channel (2B + D) for voice call trunking.
The B channels provide two CO/PBX connections. Caller ID is usually a standard feature on ISDN-BRI
provided trunks. Caller ID indication displays the calling party telephone number on the LCD of the
Multiline Terminal for CO incoming calls. This interface provides voice communication path only.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
To provide ISDN trunk connection:
H
BRT(4)-U( ) ETU
H
CLKG-U( ) Unit
H
NT-1 for each BRI (locally provided)
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The BRT(4)-U( ) ETU can be installed in any Interface Slot (1~8) of any Cabinet (1~3).
H
With an Electra Elite IPK - Basic port package, a maximum of two BRT(4)-U( ) ETUs can be
installed and supports 16 ISDN trunks (B channels).
H
With an Electra Elite IPK - Expanded port package, a maximum of eight BRT(4)-U( ) ETUs can be
installed and support 64 ISDN trunks (B channels).
H
ISDN Trunk DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection is effective after Answer Supervision is received
from the CO.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 47
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
When an ISDN line Layer 1 or Layer 2 down condition occurs, the CO line key red LED is on, and
the following message is displayed on the second line of the LCD of the Multiline Terminals
connected to Port 01:
H
Layer 1 Down: COxx Layer1 DOWN
H
Layer 2 Down: COxx Layer2 DOWN
xx represents the CO Trunk number (01-64).
Layer 1 down display has a higher priority than Layer 2 down. This error display disappears automatically
when Layer 1/Layer 2 error is recovered. The T1 line error display has a higher priority than ISDN line Layer
1/Layer 2 down.
Restrictions:
H
The Electra Elite IPK ISDN-BRI provides voice communication only.
H
The system does not support multipoint access.
H
The Electra Elite IPK system supports the NI-1 (National ISDN-1) protocol. The AT&T and Nortel
proprietary protocols are not supported.
H
The BRT(4)-U( ) ETU supports the S/T-type interface but not the U interface.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
A-23
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T-1
C-5
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
I-7
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
M-6
Multiple Trunk Groups
U-4
Universal Slots
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 48
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
CO Line Services
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
¦+AD , Master Clock Selection
1-8-33
¦+AN
ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection
1-1-80
¦+AN
ISDN Dial Interval Time Selection
1-1-81
¦+BCT
Trunk Internal Transmit Pad Selection
3-29
¦+BCT
Trunk Internal Receive Pad Selection
3-30
¦+BCT
Trunk External Transmit Pad Selection
3-31
¦+BCT
Trunk External Receive Pad Selection
3-32
¦+AN , ISDN Line SPID Assignment
3-50
¦+AN , ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment
3-52
¦+
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
BTM
¦+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
¦+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
¦+BT
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
4-37
M
Mode)
¦+BT
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
4-38
M
Mode)
, When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 49
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Calling Party Number [CPN] Service
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
¦+BS
MIF (Caller ID) Assignment
7-3-04
¦
Caller ID Display Assignment for System
1-1-78
+ AI
Mode
¦
, Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
4-3, 4-4,
+BTS
5-7, 6-5
¦+BCT
DIT Assignment
3-42
¦+BCT
ANA Assignment
3-43
¦+ AI
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX Line
3-44
¦+ AI
Caller Name Indication Selection
3-53
¦+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
¦+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
¦+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
¦
Station to Class of Service Feature
4-17
+BTT
Assignment
¦
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day
4-37
+BTM
Mode)
¦
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night
4-38
+BTM
Mode)
¦+ AI
Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO Selection
4-44
¦+ AI
Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment
4-49
, When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 50
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
ISDN-PRI (Integrated Service Digital Network - Primary Rate Interface) is a Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN) service that provides 23 B channels (16 B channels for the Electra Elite IPK - Basic port
package) and a single D channel (23B+1D) for trunking. The Electra Elite IPK supports CO Line or DID
Line type connections. The following services are available with an ISDN-PRI circuit.
CO Line Service
When configured for CO Line Service, the trunks emulate Loop Start or Ground Start trunks for both
outgoing and incoming calls.
DID Line Service
When configured for DID Line Service, the trunks emulate Loop Start or Ground Start trunks for outgoing
calls DID trunks and incoming calls.
Call By Call Service
Call By call Service allows multiple services to share a PRI line. When a call is originated or terminated,
an Information Element (IE) called the Network Specified Facility (NSF) is added to the SETUP message
to identify the service associated with the call.
Calling Party Number (CPN) Service
Calling Party Number (CPN) Service can display the calling party telephone number and/or name on the
LCD of the Multiline Terminal for incoming calls. This emulates Caller ID Indication of Analog Trunks.
Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station
Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station allows the unique 10-digit station number
(representing the DID number of the originating station) to be sent out over the PRI circuit.
Enhanced 911 Service with ISDN PRI
Enhanced 911 Service is supported by defining an available ISDN PRI trunk as a E911 trunk. When a
station user dials 911, 9+ 911, or CO line key + 911, the E911 trunk is selected and the Public Safety
Answering Point (PSAP) is called. The PSAP is provided callback information generated from the
Electra Elite IPK system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 51
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The PRT(1)-U( ) ETU can be installed in any Interface Slot (1~8) of any cabinet (1~3) without
requiring adjacent slots to be vacant.
H
When an ISDN line layer 1 or layer 2 down condition occurs, the CO line key LED in On (Red), and
the following error message is displayed on the first line of the LCD of Multiline Terminals
connected to port 1:
J
Layer 1 Down: COxx Layer 1 DOWN
J
Layer 2 Down: COxx Layer 2 DOWN
J
xx is the CO Trunk Number (01~64)
J
Layer 1 has a higher priority than Layer 2
J
This display disappears automatically when the error is recovered
H
A PRT Firmware Upgrade Kit can be used to upgrade the firmware loaded in PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs.
Restrictions:
H
The PRT(1)-U( ) ETU can be assigned in Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment) with
the following configurations:
J
PRT4 (4 ports, 4 B channels)
J
PRT8 (8 ports, 8 B channels)
J
PRT12 (12 ports, 12 B channels)
J
PRT16 (16 ports, 16 B channels)
J
PRT20 (20 ports, 20 B channels)
J
PRT24 (24 ports, 23 B channels)
H
With an Electra Elite IPK - Basic port package, a maximum of 16 ISDN trunks (B channels) can be
assigned.
H
With an Electra Elite IPK - Expanded port package, up to 62 ISDN trunks (B channels) can be
assigned when three PRT ETUs are installed. The first two ETUs provide 23 B channels, and the
third ETU provides 16 B channels (23+23+16 = 62).
H
With an Electra Elite IPK - Basic port package, a maximum of four PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs can be
installed. When four PRT ETUs are installed, up to four trunks each can be assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 52
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
With an Electra Elite IPK - Expanded port package, a maximum of eight PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs can be
installed. When eight PRT ETUs are installed, up to eight trunks each can be assigned.
H
The ISDN-PRI interface provides voice communication only.
H
The Electra Elite IPK system does not support Multipoint Access.
H
The ISDN-PRI services available depend on the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU firmware version. Refer to the
following table to determine the required firmware version.
Version
Services
Comments
1.00
CO Line emulation only
Initial Release
2.00
Call By Call and DID functions
MIFM-U( ) Software 2.00 or higher and LCR
PC Software 2.00 or higher are required for
Call By Call functions.
2.12
E-911 Service and Calling Party
Number (CPN) Presentation from
Station
3.60
Calling Party Number (CPN) Name
4.0
Individually Channel Assignment
and PRT B Channel-to-Trunk
Group
Restrictions for Calling Party Name:
H
The Electra Elite IPK supports receiving the name from the Network in supported formats only and
cannot send the Calling Name. Refer to the following table.
Protocols
Name Delivery Formats
NI-2
Facility Information Element
4ESS (AT&T Custom)
Not Supported
AT&T 5ESS Lucent Custom
Facility Information Element
DMS-100 (Custom),
Display Information Element,
DMS-100 (National; ISDN),,
Facility Information Element,,
,Nortel Specification NIS-A211-1
,,Nortel Specification NIS-A233-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 53
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions for Calling Party Number Presentation from Station:
H
Redirecting Name is not supported by the Electra Elite IPK. Redirecting Name (originally called
name and last redirecting name) is sent when an incoming call is forwarded from another Telco or
System.
H
The Electra Elite IPK can only display 13 characters of the provided Name or Number from the
ISDN Network.
H
The Electra Elite IPK does not display the name presentation status as private or unavailable.
H
When Memory Block 4-47 (ISDN Directory Number Selection) is assigned as YES, and Memory
Block 4-62 (ISDN-PRI Directory Number Selection) has a number assigned, the setting in Memory
Block 4-62 overrides the number set in Memory block 3-52 (ISDN Trunk Directory Number
Assignment) when the station places an outgoing call using PRI. PRT Firmware 2.12 or higher is
required.
H
PRT trunk types must be assigned as DID in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection) for
Memory block 4-62 (ISDN-PRI Directory Number Selection) to provide the number to the
ISDN-PRI Network.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
A-23
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T-1
C-5
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
D-9
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
E-8
Enhanced 911
M-6
Multiple Trunk Groups
U-4
Universal Slots
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 54
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
ISDN PRI Installation
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
¦+AD
Master Clock Selection
1-8-33
¦+AN
ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection
1-1-80
¦+AN
PRT Channel Assignment
1-13-00
¦+AN
PRT Signal Format Selection
1-13-01
¦+AN
Clear Channel Selection
1-13-02
¦+AN
Call by Call Service Selection
1-13-03
¦+AN
PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority Selection
1-13-04
¦+AN
PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-13-05
¦+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
¦+BCT
Trunk Internal Transmit Pad Selection
3-29
¦+BCT
Trunk Internal Receive Pad Selection
3-30
¦+BCT
Trunk External Transmit Pad Selection
3-31
¦+BCT
Trunk External Receive Pad Selection
3-32
¦+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
CO Line Services
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
¦+AN
, ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment
3-52
¦+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-01
¦+BTT
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-02
¦+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 55
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
DID Line Service
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BCT , Trunk Type Selection
3-91
¦
Digit Add/Delete for Tie Line Networking
5-00
+ALN
Assignment
¦+ALN
DID Digit Length Selection
1-1-20
¦+ALN
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
1-1-21
¦+ALN
DID Digit Conversion Table
1-1-22
¦
DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station
1-1-23
+ALN
or Undefined Digit
Call By Call Service
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+AY
, Call by Call Service Selection
1-13-03
¦+AY
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-00
¦+AY
Call By Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-01
¦+AY
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-02
¦+AY
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-03
¦+AY
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
1-10-04
¦
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment
1-10-05
+AY
(Service)
¦
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment
1-10-06
+AY
(Feature)
¦+AY
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-07
¦+AY
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-08
¦
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group
1-10-09
+AY
Assignment
¦+AY
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-20
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 56
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Call By Call Service (Continued)
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦
Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG
1-10-21
+AY
Assignment
¦+AY
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-10-22
Calling Party Nu m b e r ( C P N ) S e r v i c e
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BS
MIF (Caller ID) Assignment
7-3-04
¦
Caller ID Display Assignment for System
1-1-78
+AI
Mode
¦
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
4-3, 4-4,
+BTS
5-7, 6-5
¦
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX
3-44
+AI
Line
¦
Station to Class of Service Feature
4-17
+BTT
Assignment
¦+AI
Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO Selection
4-44
¦+AI
Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment
4-49
Calling Party Nu m b e r ( C P N ) P r e s e n t a t i o n f r o m S t a t i o n
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BCT , Trunk Type Selection
3-91
¦+AN
ISDN Directory Number Selection
4-47
¦+AN
, ISDN-PRI Directory Number Selection
4-62
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 57
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Enhanced 911 Service with ISDN-PRI
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+AE
, Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-43
¦+AE
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-44
¦
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-45
+AE
(Maintenance Busy)
¦+AE
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
1-8-46
¦+BCT , Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
¦+AN
ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment
3-52
¦
, Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table
4-54
+AE
Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 58
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Key-Common Channel Interoffice
Signaling (K-CCIS)
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) allows multiple systems to be connected together
to provide additional feature compatibility, above what normal Tie Lines provide. The system is
configured with the 24-channel Digital Trunk Interface (DTI), a Common Channel Handler (CCH) for
receiving or transmitting common signaling data from/to a distant office, and a CLKG-U( ) Unit for
network synchronization. The system can provide a variety of interoffice service features such as
Calling Name display, Centralized Voice Mail Integration, or Link Reconnect.
MIFM-U( ) Software and LCR PC software are required to program the expanded Route Advance Block
Assignments in LCR.
The following features are provided:
H
Call Forwarding - All Calls - K-CCIS
H
Call Forwarding - Busy/No Answer - K-CCIS
H
Call Transfer - All Calls - K-CCIS
H
Calling Name Display - K-CCIS
H
Calling Number Display - K-CCIS
H
Centralized Billing - K-CCIS
H
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change - K-CCIS
H
Dial Access to Attendant - K-CCIS
H
Direct Inward Dialing - K-CCIS
H
Dual hold - K-CCIS
H
Elapsed Time Display - K-CCIS
H
Flexible Numbering of Stations - K-CCIS
H
Hands-Free Answerback - K-CCIS
H
Hot Line - K-CCIS
H
Link Reconnect - K-CCIS
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 59
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Multiple Call Forwarding - All Calls - K-CCIS
H
Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy/No Answer - K-CCIS
H
Paging Access - K-CCIS
H
Station-to-Station Calling - K-CCIS
H
Uniform Numbering Plan - K-CCIS
H
Voice Call - K-CCIS
H
Voice Mail Integration - K-CCIS
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
DTI-U30 ETU or higher
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU,
Phase Lock Oscillator
CLKG-U( ) Unit (Phase Lock Oscillator)
MIFM-U( ) ETU (if Call Routing using LCR is required),,
, CCH(4)-U( ) ETU firmware V2.0 or higher is required for the following features:
· Centralized Billing (K-CCIS)
· Centralized Day/Night Mode Change (K-CCIS)
· Dial Access to Attendant (K-CCIS)
· Paging Access (K-CCIS)
,, When expanded Route Advanced Block assignment for Least Cost Routing (LCR) is required, MIFM-
U( ) firmware V4.00 or higher and LCR PC software 3.00 or higher are required.
When Centralized Billing-Client (K-CCIS) is required, MIFM-U( ) firmware V5.00 or higher is required.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 60
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Normal call handling procedures apply.
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) Manual.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Each Electra Elite IPK system can have up to four K-CCIS routes.
H
One DTI(1)-U30 ETU can be used to support/connect a maximum of four K-CCIS Links.
H
The Basic Port Package can have up to 15 DTI trunks for K-CCIS Voice path.
H
The Expanded Port Package can have up to 63 DTI trunks for K-CCIS Voice path.
H
The K-CCIS feature shares the CO/PBX/Tie/DID trunks available for the system.
H
When assigning a Closed Numbering Plan and DID conversion across K-CCIS is required, the
Electra Elite IPK uses the Closed Number Blocks.
H
When assigning a Closed Numbering Plan and DID conversion across K-CCIS is not required, the
Electra Elite IPK uses the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) table 4.
H
The Electra Elite IPK uses the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) table 1, 2, or 3 to assign the Open
Numbering Plan.
H
When all K-CCIS voice channels are busy, the Electra Elite IPK originator of a K-CCIS call hears a
busy tone from the system.
H
Outgoing CO calls in a K-CCIS network can be routed over the K-CCIS link and use the distant
system CO lines.
H
Distant system extension numbers in the K-CCIS network can be assigned to Feature Access or
One Touch keys and Speed Dial buffers.
H
If a K-CCIS trunk is on hold, the Specified Line Seizure access codes can be used to retrieve the
call from its held state.
H
The Elite ACD Plus can support and distribute incoming calls from a remote K-CCIS office.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 61
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions:
H
The Electra Elite IPK can only support 2~4-digit station numbers.
H
For a Closed Numbering Plan network using Closed Numbering Blocks, a maximum of 16
Numbering Blocks are available allowing a maximum of 17 connected systems per K-CCIS
network.
H
When a Closed Numbering Plan Network is used, a user can call another station by dialing the
distant extension number, but extensions in the network cannot have the same prefix.
H
For an Open Numbering Plan network, the ARS feature, table 1, 2 or 3 must be used to place
station-to-station calls over K-CCIS.
H
For an Open Numbering Plan network, a user can dial another station by dialing the office location
number plus an extension number and the extension number can have the same prefix, but the
office location cannot be the same.
H
An Electra Elite IPK K-CCIS network should never have more than five hops (tandem connections)
because of the message delay through each tandem system.
H
A Star topology network supports only five systems because of the CCH channels in the Main/Hub
system.
H
A Tree topology network is supported. The maximum number of systems depends on the
Numbering Plan used and the maximum number of hops (tandem connections).
H
Mesh topology is not supported by the Electra Elite IPK only network.
H
K-CCIS requires assigning a point code for each office. Point codes differentiate between an
originating office and a destination office in the K-CCIS Network. Assigning point codes requires
the following considerations:
J
The point code must be unique in the network.
J
When a system has two or more CCH channels, the same originating point code must be
assigned to all channels in the system.
J
The Electra Elite IPK can have a maximum of 255 codes assigned to distant systems.
H
Using an Electra Elite IPK to Electra Elite IPK network, centralized voice is not supported when an
Open Numbering Plan is used.
H
Each Electra Elite IPK system in a K-CCIS network must have at least one local trunk for
Emergency 911 calls.
H
Using a NEAX to Electra Elite IPK network, the PBX must supply centralized voice mail.
H
Multiline terminals must have an available Call Appearance (CAP) key to originate or answer a K-
CCIS trunk call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 62
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Direct access of K-CCIS voice or data channels using Line keys or Specified Line Seizure access
codes is prohibited.
H
A Single Line Telephone or PSII user cannot transfer a trunk or K-CCIS call to another user on a
remote system across K-CCIS.
H
Recall key or Drop key does not function on K-CCIS calls. When either key is pressed, operation is
ignored, and the call continues.
H
Trunk queuing is prohibited on a K-CCIS trunk route.
H
The ability to route an incoming DID call directly across a K-CCIS link (Direct Inward Dialing-
K-CCIS) is only supported when a Closed Numbering Plan using Closed Numbering Blocks is
used.
H
This feature is not supported by the TLI(2)-U( ) ETU Analog Line interface.
H
Only one CCH(4)-U( ) ETU can be assigned per system.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
T-1
T1 Connection
U-4
Universal Slots
Refer to the Electra Electra Elite IPK Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) Manual for
more details.
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Closed Number Plan
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
¦+AD
Master Clock Selection
1-8-33
¦+AD
T1 Signal Format Selection
1-11-00
¦+AD
Clear Channel Selection
1-11-01
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 63
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+AD
Line Length Selection
1-11-02
¦+AD
T1 Channel Selection
1-11-05
¦+AD
DTI Trunk Type Assignment
1-11-07
¦+AD
Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment
1-11-08
¦+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
¦+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No Selection
3-04
¦+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
¦+ALT
Tie Line Type Assignment
3-14
¦+AW
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-00
¦
Common Signal Channel Data Speed
1-15-01
+AW
Assignment
¦+AW
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-02
¦+AW
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-03
¦+AW
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
¦+AW
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-05
¦+AW
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-06
¦
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout
1-15-07
+AW
Assignment
¦+AW
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-08
¦
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop
1-15-09
+AW
Assignment
¦+AW
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-10
¦+AW
CIC Number Assignment
3-70
¦+AW
LCR Class to Trunk Group Selection
5-04
¦+AW
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
5-05
¦+BS
2-, 3-, or 4-digit Station Number Selection
1-2-03
¦+BA
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46~48
601~603
¦
Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance
1-1-49
+BCS
Assignment
¦+BCS
CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment
1-1-50
¦+BS
Station Number Assignment
4-10
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 64
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
Closed Numbering Plan
This sections provides the steps needed to program a closed numbering plan.
Step 1: T1 Tie Lines
The following diagram provides an example of Memory Blocks that are programmed for T1 Tie lines.
The example assumes that each Electra Elite system is defaulted with the T1 cards and the CCH ETU
card(s) are installed.
Abbreviations used in the diagram:
MB = Memory Block
TRK = Trunk
TG = Trunk Group
CC = Clear Channel
TT = Trunk Type
MB 1-8-33
MB 1-8-33
MB 1-8-33
MB 1-8-33
Master
Slave
Slave
Slave
Refer to K-CCIS
Refer to K-CCIS
Refer to K-CCIS
Refer to K-CCIS
Manual.
Manual.
Manual.
Manual.
MB 1-11-01
MB 1-11-01
MB 1-11-01
MB 1-11-01
CC = B8ZS
CC = B8ZS
CC = B8ZS
CC = B8ZS
MB 1-11-07
MB 1-11-07
MB 1-11-07
MB 1-11-07
TT = E&M
TT = E&M
TT = E&M
TT = E&M
MB 3-03
MB 3-03
MB 3-03
MB 3-03
TRK 01~24 = TG 10
TRK 01~24 = TG 10
TRK 01~24 = TG 10
TRK 01~24 =TG 10
TRK 25~48 = TG 11
TRK 25~48 = TG 11
MB 3-04
MB 3-04
MB 3-04
MB 3-04
TRK 01~24 = YES
TRK 01~48 = YES
TRK 01~48 = YES
TRK 01~24 = YES
MB 3-14
MB 3-14
MB 3-14
MB 3-14
TRK 01~24 = WINK
TRK 01~48 = WINK
TRK 01~48 = WINK
TRK 01~24 =WINK
MB 3-91
MB 3-91
MB 3-91
MB 3-91
TRK 01~24 = Tie
TRK 01~48 = Tie
TRK 01~48 = Tie
TRK 01~24 = Tie
MB 4-10
MB 4-10
MB 4-10
All Phones = 2XX
All Phones = 3XX
All Phones = 4XX
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 65
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Closed Numbering Plan
The following diagram provides an example of Memory Blocks that are programmed for Closed
Numbering. The example assumes that Step 1: T1 Tie Lines is completed.
AC = Access Code
BLK = Closed Numbering Block
MB = Memory Block
ACG = Access Item Code
TT = Trunk Type
Calling
Calling
Calling
Calling
200 ~ 230
100 ~ 130
100 ~ 130
100 ~ 130
300 ~ 330
300 ~ 330
200 ~ 230
200 ~ 230
400 ~ 430
400 ~ 430
400 ~ 430
300 ~ 330
MB 1-1-46
MB 1-1-46
MB 1-1-46
MB 1-1-46
AC 1 = Item 001
AC 1 = Item 401
AC 1 = Item 401
AC 1 = Item 401
AC 2 = Item 401
AC 2 = Item 001
AC 2 = Item 402
AC 2 = Item 402
AC 3 = Item 402
AC 3 = Item 402
AC 3 = Item 001
AC 3 = Item 003
AC 4 = Item 403
AC 4 = Item 403
AC 4 = Item 403
AC 4 = Item 001
MB 1-1-49
MB 1-1-49
MB 1-1-49
MB 1-1-49
BLK 01 = 110
BLK 01 = 110
BLK 01 = 110
BLK 01 = 110
BLK 02 = 110
BLK 02 = 111
BLK 02 = 110
BLK 02 = 110
BLK 03 = 110
BLK 03 = 111
BLK 03 = 111
BLK 03 = 110
MB 1-1-50
MB 1-1-50
MB 1-1-50
MB 1-1-50
BLK 01 = Add 2
BLK 01 = Add 1
BLK 01 = Add 1
BLK 01 = Add 1
BLK 02 = Add 3
BLK 02 = Add 3
BLK 02 = Add 2
BLK 01 = Add 2
BLK 03 = Add 4
BLK 03 = Add 4
BLK 03 = Add 4
BLK 01 = Add 3
Before moving on to the next step, test the T1 Tie lines and the Closed Numbering Plan.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 66
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Step 3: CCIS Activation
The following diagram provides an example of Memory Blocks that are programmed for K-CCIS. The
example assumes that Step 1: T1 Tie Lines and Step 2: Closing Number Plan are completed.
DSTCCH = Destination Point Code
CCH = Control Channel Handler
TRK = Trunk
ORGCCH = Originating Point Code
TG = Trunk Group
MB 3-70
MB 3-70
MB 3-70
MB 3-70
TRK 01~23 = 001~023
TRK 01~23 = 001~023
TRK 01~23 = 001~023
TRK 01~23 = 001~023
TRK 25~47 = 024~047
TRK 25~47 = 024~047
MB 3-03
MB 3-03
MB 3-03
MB 3-03
TRK 24 = 00
TRK 24 = 00
TRK 24 = 00
TRK 24 = 00
TRK 48 = 00
TRK 48 = 00
MB 3-91
MB 3-91
MB 3-91
MB 3-91
TRK 24 = CO
TRK 24 = CO
TRK 24 = CO
TRK 24 = CO
TRK 48 = CO
TRK 48 = CO
TRK 48 = CO
MB 1-15-01
MB 1-15-01
MB 1-15-01
MB 1-15-01
CCH 1 = 56K
CCH 1 = 56K
CCH 1 = 56K
CCH 1 = 56K
CCH2 = 56K
CCH2 = 56K
MB 1-15-02
MB 1-15-02
MB 1-15-02
MB 1-15-02
CCH 1 = TRK 24
CCH 1 = TRK 24
CCH 1 = TRK 24
CCH 1 = TRK 24
CCH2 = TRK 48
CCH 2 = TRK 48
MB 1-15-03
MB 1-15-03
MB 1-15-03
MB 1-15-03
ORGCCH 1 = 00001
ORGCCH 1 = 00002
ORGCCH 1 = 00003
ORGCCH 1 = 00004
ORGCCH 2 = 00002
ORGCCH 2 = 00003
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 67
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
MB 1-15-04
MB 1-15-04
MB 1-15-04
MB 1-15-04
DSTCCH1 = 00002
DSTCCH 1 = 00001
DSTCCH 1 = 00002
DSTCCH 1 = 00003
DSTCCH 2 = 00003
DSTCCH 2 = 00004
MB 1-15-05
MB 1-15-05
MB 1-15-05
MB 1-15-05
T001:00001 = 1
T001:00001 = 1
T002:00003 = 2
T002:00002 = 1
T003:00004 = 2
Too3:00004 = 2
MB 5-05
MB 5-05
MB 5-05
MB 5-05
TG 10 = CCH 1
TG 10 = CCH 1
TG 10 = CCH 1
TG 10 = CCH 1
TG 11 = CCH 2
TG 11 = CCH 2
MB 1-15-06
MB 1-15-06
MB 1-15-06
MB 1-15-06
Office = 25
Office = 26
Office = 27
Office = 28
MB 1-15-00
MB 1-15-00
MB 1-15-00
MB 1-15-00
*Main
*Remote
*Remote
*Remote
* Any setting other than NONE (default) activates K-CCIS. A setting or Main or Remote depends on the
system software level and the system location. Refer to the K-CCIS Manual for detailed information.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 68
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Open Numbering Plan
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
¦+AD
Master Clock Selection
1-8-33
¦+AD
T1 Signal Format Selection
1-11-00
¦+AD
Clear Channel Selection
1-11-01
¦+AD
Line Length Selection
1-11-02
¦+AD
T1 Channel Selection
1-11-05
¦+AD
DTI Trunk Type Assignment
1-11-07
¦+AD
Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment
1-11-08
¦+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
¦+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No Selection
3-04
¦+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
¦+ALT
Tie Line Type Assignment
3-14
¦+AW
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-00
¦
Common Signal Channel Data Speed
1-15-01
+AW
Assignment
¦+AW
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-02
¦+AW
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-03
¦+AW
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
¦+AW
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-05
¦+AW
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-06
¦
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout
1-15-07
+AW
Assignment
¦+AW
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-08
¦
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop
1-15-09
+AW
Assignment
¦+AW
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-10
¦+AW
CIC Number Assignment
3-70
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 69
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+AW
LCR Class to Trunk Group Selection
5-04
¦+AW
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
5-05
¦+BS
2-, 3-, or 4-digit Station Number Selection
1-2-03
¦+BA
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-46~48
601~603
¦+BS
Station Number Assignment
4-10
¦+BTM
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-12
¦+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
¦+AB
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-00
¦+AB
ARS dialing Assignment
1-14-01
¦+AB
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-02
¦+AB
ARS Route Table Number Assignment
1-14-03
¦
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number
1-14-04
+AB
Assignment
¦+AB
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
1-14-05
¦+AB
ARS Digit Add Assignment
1-14-06
¦+AM
ARS Max Digit Assignment
1-14-07
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 70
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
Open Numbering Plan
This sections provides the steps needed to program an open numbering plan.
Step 1: T1 Tie Lines
The following diagram provides an example of Memory Blocks that are programmed for T1 Tie lines.
The example assumes that each Electra Elite system is defaulted with the T1 cards and the CCH ETU
card installed.
Abbreviations used in the diagram:
MB = Memory Block
TRK = Trunk
TG = Trunk Group
CC = Clear Channel
TT = Trunk Type
MB 1-8-33
MB 1-8-33
MB 1-8-33
MB 1-8-33
Master
Slave
Slave
Slave
Refer to K-CCIS
Refer to K-CCIS
Refer to K-CCIS
Refer to K-CCIS
Manual.
Manual.
Manual.
Manual.
MB 1-11-01
MB 1-11-01
MB 1-11-01
MB 1-11-01
CC = B8ZS
CC = B8ZS
CC = B8ZS
CC = B8ZS
MB 1-11-07
MB 1-11-07
MB 1-11-07
MB 1-11-07
TT 1= E&M
TT 1= E&M
TT 1= E&M
TT 1= E&M
TT 2= E&M
TT 2= E&M
MB 3-03
MB 3-03
MB 3-03
MB 3-03
TRK 01~24 = TG 10
TRK 01~24 = TG 10
TRK 01~24 = TG 10
TRK 01~24 =TG 10
TRK 25~48 = TG 11
TRK 25~48 = TG 11
MB 3-04
MB 3-04
MB 3-04
MB 3-04
TRK 01~24 = YES
TRK 01~48 = YES
TRK 01~48 = YES
TRK 01~24 = YES
MB 3-14
MB 3-14
MB 3-14
MB 3-14
TRK 01~24 = WINK
TRK 01~48 = WINK
TRK 01~48 = WINK
TRK 01~24 =WINK
MB 3-91
MB 3-91
MB 3-91
MB 3-91
TRK 01~24 = Tie
TRK 01~48 = Tie
TRK 01~48 = Tie
TRK 01~24 = Tie
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 71
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Open Numbering Plan
The following diagram provides an example of Memory Blocks that are programmed for Open
Numbering. The example assumes that Step 1: T1 Tie Lines is completed.
Abbreviations used in the diagram:
AC = Access Code
ACG = Access Item Code
MB = Memory Block
RT = Route
TB = ARS Table
Calling
Calling
Calling
Calling
100 ~ 130
100 ~ 130
100 ~ 130
100 ~ 130
MB 1-1-46
MB 1-1-46
MB 1-1-46
MB 1-1-46
AC 8 = Item 601
AC 8 = Item 601
AC 8 = Item 601
AC 8 = Item 601
MB 1-14-01
MB 1-14-01
MB 1-14-01
MB 1-14-01
TB 01 DN 01 = 25
TB 01 DN 01 = 25
TB 01 DN 01 = 25
TB 01 DN 01 = 25
TB 01 DN 02 = 26
TB 01 DN 02 = 26
TB 01 DN 02 = 26
TB 01 DN 02 = 26
TB 01 DN 03 = 27
TB 01 DN 03 = 27
TB 01 DN 03 = 27
TB 01 DN 03 = 27
TB 01 DN 04 = 28
TB 01 DN 04 = 28
TB 01 DN 04 = 28
TB 01 DN 04 = 28
MB 1-14-02
MB 1-14-02
MB 1-14-02
MB 1-14-02
TB 01 DN 01 = Yes
TB 01 DN 01 = Yes
TB 01 DN 01 = Yes
TB 01 DN 01 = Yes
TB 01 DN 02 = Yes
TB 01 DN 02 = Yes
TB 01 DN 02 = Yes
TB 01 DN 02 = Yes
TB 01 DN 03 = Yes
TB 01 DN 03 = Yes
TB 01 DN 03 = Yes
TB 01 DN 03 = Yes
TB 01 DN 04 = Yes
TB 01 DN 04 = Yes
TB 01 DN 04 = Yes
TB 01 DN 04 = Yes
MB 1-14-03
MB 1-14-03
MB 1-14-03
MB 1-14-03
TB 01 DN 01 = RT 01
TB 01 DN 01 = RT 01
TB 01 DN 01 = RT 01
TB 01 DN 01 = RT 01
TB 01 DN 02 = RT 02
TB 01 DN 02 = RT 02
TB 01 DN 02 = RT 02
TB 01 DN 02 = RT 02
TB 01 DN 03 = RT 03
TB 01 DN 03 = RT 03
TB 01 DN 03 = RT 03
TB 01 DN 03 = RT 03
TB 01 DN 04 = RT 04
TB 01 DN 04 = RT 04
TB 01 DN 04 = RT 04
TB 01 DN 04 = RT 04
MB 1-14-04
MB 1-14-04
MB 1-14-04
MB 1-14-04
RT 01 = ICM
RT 01 = TG 10
RT 01 = TG 10
RT 01 = TG 10
RT 02 = TG 10
RT 02 = ICM
RT 02 = TG 10
RT 02 = TG 10
RT 03 = TG 10
RT 03 = TG 11
RT 03 = ICM
RT 03 = TG 10
RT 04 = TG 10
RT 04 = TG 11
RT 04 = TG 11
RT 04 = ICM
MB 1-14-05
MB 1-14-05
MB 1-14-05
MB 1-14-05
RT 01 = 03
RT 01 = 00
RT 01 = 00
RT 01 = 00
RT 02 = 00
RT 02 = 03
RT 02 = 00
RT 02 = 00
RT 03 = 00
RT 03 = 00
RT 03 = 03
RT 03 = 00
RT 04 = 00
RT 04 = 00
RT 04 = 00
RT 04 = 03
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 72
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
MB 1-14-06
MB 1-14-06
MB 1-14-06
MB 1-14-06
RT 01 = Blank
RT 01 = 8
RT 01 = 8
RT 01 = 8
RT 02 = 8
RT 02 = Blank
RT 02 = 8
RT 02 = 8
RT 03 = 8
RT 03 = 8
RT 03 = Blank
RT 03 = 8
RT 04 = 8
RT 04 = 8
RT 04 = 8
RT 04 = Blank
MB 1-14-07
MB 1-14-07
MB 1-14-07
MB 1-14-07
RT 01 = 03
RT 01 = 06
RT 01 = 06
RT 01 = 06
RT 02 = 06
RT 02 = 03
RT 02 = 06
RT 02 = 06
RT 03 = 06
RT 03 = 06
RT 03 = 03
RT 03 = 06
RT 04 = 06
RT 04 = 06
RT 04 = 06
RT 04 = 03
Before moving to the next step, test the T1 Tie lines and the Open Numbering Plan.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 73
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Step 3: CCIS Activation
The following diagram provides an example of Memory Blocks that are programmed for K-CCIS. The
example assumes that Step 1: T1 Tie Lines and Step 2: Open Number Plan were completed.
DSTCCH = Destination Point Code
CCH = Control Channel Handler
TRK = Trunk
ORGCCH = Originating Point Code
TG = Trunk Group
MB 3-70
MB 3-70
MB 3-70
MB 3-70
TRK 01~23 = 001~023
TRK 01~23 = 001~023
TRK 01~23 = 001~023
TRK 01~23 = 001~023
TRK 25~47 = 001~023
TRK 25~47 = 001~023
MB 3-03
MB 3-03
MB 3-03
MB 3-03
TRK 24 = 00
TRK 24 = 00
TRK 24 = 00
TRK 24 = 00
TRK 48 = 00
TRK 48 = 00
MB 3-91
MB 3-91
MB 3-91
MB 3-91
TRK 24 = CO
TRK 24 = CO
TRK 24 = CO
TRK 24 = CO
TRK 48 = CO
TRK 48 = CO
TRK 48 = CO
MB 1-15-01
MB 1-15-01
MB 1-15-01
MB 1-15-01
CCH 1 = 56K
CCH 1 = 56K
CCH 1 = 56K
CCH 1 = 56K
CCH2 = 56K
CCH2 = 56K
MB 1-15-02
MB 1-15-02
MB 1-15-02
MB 1-15-02
CCH 1 = TRK 24
CCH 1 = TRK 24
CCH 1 = TRK 24
CCH 1 = TRK 24
CCH2 = TRK 48
CCH 2 = TRK 48
MB 1-15-03
MB 1-15-03
MB 1-15-03
MB 1-15-03
ORGCCH 1 = 00001
ORGCCH 1 = 00002
ORGCCH 1 = 00003
ORGCCH 1 = 00004
ORGCCH 2 = 00002
ORGCCH 2 = 00003
MB 1-15-04
MB 1-15-04
MB 1-15-04
MB 1-15-04
DSTCCH1 = 00002
DSTCCH 1 = 00001
DSTCCH 1 = 00002
DSTCCH 1 = 00003
DSTCCH 2 = 00003
DSTCCH 2 = 00004
MB 1-15-05
MB 1-15-05
MB 1-15-05
MB 1-15-05
T001:00001 = 1
T001:00001 = 1
T002:00003 = 2
T002:00002 = 1
T003:00004 = 2
Too3:00004 = 2
MB 5-05
MB 5-05
MB 5-05
MB 5-05
TG 10 = CCH 1
TG 10 = CCH 1
TG 10 = CCH 1
TG 10 = CCH 1
TG 11 = CCH 2
TG 11 = CCH 2
Note: Any setting other than NONE (default) activates K-CCIS. A setting of Main or
Remote depends on the system software level and system location. Refer to Key-
Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) Manual for detailed information.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 74
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Music on Hold
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
A locally provided music source or an internal music source can be used to supply music to parties on
hold, to assure them that they are still connected to the system.
System Software allows CO ports to provide multiple music sources to different COs in the system.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
External source connected to the RCA jack on the basic B64-U20 KSU.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Data Assignment:
H
Use Memory Block 1-8-09 (Music on Hold Pattern Selection) to select the Music on Hold pattern
(default: A).
H
Use Memory Block 1-8-31 (Hold Tone Source Assignment) to assign the internal (default: INT) or
external (EXT) Music on Hold source.
H
Use Memory Block 1-8-32 (Hold Interval Tone Volume Selection) to pad the Music (default: 0 dB)
by -6dB when the Internal source is used.
General:
H
Music On Hold (MOH) is provided for all outside and internal calls on hold.
H
Music On Hold can be disabled if required.
H
Use Memory Block 4-66 (MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection) to assign MOH or Ring Back Tone for
the outside party when a trunk call is placed on hold by the Transfer key on a Dterm, or hook flash
from a Single Line Telephone, or the Transfer or Hold keys at a PSII station.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 75
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Music On Hold is provided using the built-in tone melodies or an external source connected to the
RCA jack on the basic B64-U20 KSU for the Expanded Port Package.
H
Internal Source:
Program one of two melodies (American Folk Song melody, or Christmas Song melody) as an
internal source. A volume control for the built-in MOH source can also be programmed.
H
External Source:
J
Music source (radio, tape player, or CD) must be provided local y.
J
Source output levels should be less than 0.6 RMS signal level with 600 impedance.
J
Optional interface ETUs are not required for this feature.
H
A CO line that is assigned as a CO external music on hold source cannot be seized, even when the
CO trunk is assigned on a line key of a Multiline terminal.
H
A CO line that is assigned to a CO external music of hold source is skipped without being seized,
even when that CO is assigned to a trunk group.
H
When Memory Block 3-11 (CO External Source Selection) contradicts Memory Block 3-12 (CO
Hold Memory Selection) MOH works according to the Memory Block 1-8-31 (Hold Tone Source
Assignment) setting.
H
Use Memory Block 3-11 (CO External Source Selection) to specify whether the MOH source is
from the CO (default) or an EXT SOURCE. Unused circuits on a COI/COID ETU can be assigned
as MOH inputs.
H
Use Memory Block 3-12, (CO Hold Memory Selection) to assign the external music source to each
trunk.
Example:
Trunks 09 and 10 are assigned as external sources. Trunk 09 is programmed as the external
source for Trunks 01~05 when a call is placed on hold. Trunk 10 is programmed as the external
source for Trunks 06~08 when a call is placed on hold.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 76
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
A-8
Answer Hold
A-15
Attendant Transfer
A-22
Automatic Hold
H-5
Hold With Recall (Exclusive and Non-Exclusive)
S-18
Station Transfer
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement
1-4-17
+AU
Hold Tone section
¦+BCS
Music on Hold Pattern Selection
1-8-09
¦+BCS
Hold Tone Source Assignment
1-8-31
¦+BCS
Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection
1-8-32
¦+BCT
CO External Source Selection
3-11
¦+BCT
CO External Hold Memory Selection
3-12
¦+BTT
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
4-66
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 77
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Station Transfer
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Station Transfer allows any station user in the system to transfer any call to any other station. Outside
calls can be transferred to Multiline Terminals without the direct line appearance. To initiate Call Transfer,
press the Transfer key on a Multiline Terminal or use the hookswitch on a Single Line Telephone. The
transfer is completed by going on-hook on a Multiline Terminal or Single Line Telephone.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Using a Multiline Terminal with a call in progress:
G
1.
Press
. Receive internal dial tone. The call is placed on Non-Exclusive Hold.
2.
Dial the station number where the call is to be transferred.
3.
Hang up.
Using a Single Line Telephone with a call in progress:
1.
Provide hookflash. The call is put on Exclusive Hold. Receive internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the station number of the station where call is to be transferred.
3.
Hang up.
- OR -
When the party answers, announce the transfer.
4.
Restore the handset (transfer is completed).
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 78
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
After transferring an answered call, the Multiline Terminal user can enter a conference by pressing
the Conference key on the Multiline Terminal even after the Transfer key is pressed.
H
After transferring an answered call, the Single Line Telephone user can enter a conference by
providing a second hookflash.
H
Use Memory Block 4-66 (MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection) to assign MOH or Ring Back Tone for
the outside party when a trunk call is placed on hold by the Transfer key on a Dterm, or hook flash
from a Single Line Telephone, or the Transfer or Hold keys at a PSII station.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
A-15
Attendant Transfer
D-13
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
M-7
Music on Hold
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 79
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BTS
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
1-1-11
¦
System Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time
1-1-12
+BM
Selection
¦+BCS
CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection
1-1-13
¦+BCS
CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection
1-1-14
¦
Attendant Add-on Console Transfer/Camp-on
1-1-64
+BM
Recall Time Selection
¦+BTS
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-08
4-2
¦+BTT
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
4-66
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 80
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
T1 Connection
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
T1 Connection allows the system to be connected directly to FT1 carrier links using a public or private
network. The Digital Trunk Interface, DTI-U( ) ETU, provides for different types of trunk signaling with
FT1 carrier links using System Programming. The DTI-U( ) ETU supports Loop Start/Ground Start, Tie
line/DID trunks.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
DTI-U( ) ETU
Phase Lock Oscillator, CLKG-U( ) Unit Piggybacked on the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU for the Electra Elite IPK
for network synchronization
Locally provided CSU (Channel Service Unit) must be installed
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Same as Analog Trunk Operations.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
The DTI-U( ) ETU can be installed in any Interface Slot (1~8) of any Cabinet (1~3) without
requiring adjacent slots to be vacant.
H
Both the analog COI and digital DTI can exist in the same Trunk group.
H
The DTI-U( ) ETU supports Dial Pulse and DTMF signaling.
H
Groups of four Loop Start/Ground Start, Tie Line, or DID channels are assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 81
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Data Assignment:
H
Use Memory Block 1-8-33 (Master Clock Selection) to assign the source for system clocking
synchronization.
H
Use Memory Block 1-11-00 (T1 Signal Format Selection) to specify T1 Signal format. Default is 12
(SF).
H
Use Memory Block 1-11-01 (Clear Channel Selection) to specify the Clear channel ability (default:
ZCS).
H
Use Memory Block 1-11-05 (T1 Channel Selection) to specify DTI channel numbers to be used.
H
Use Memory Block 1-11-06 (Signaling Selection) to specify LS (default) or GS signaling.
H
Use Memory Block 1-11-07 (DTI Trunk Type Assignment) to assign the DTI trunk type (default:
CO) four channels at a time.
H
Use Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment) to specify the DTI-U( ) ETU. The DTI-U( )
ETU occupies between 8 and 24 ports depending on the equipment configuration.
Restrictions:
H
The DTI-U( ) ETU can be assigned in Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment) with the
following configurations:
J
DTI4 (4 ports)
J
DTI8 (8 ports)
J
DTI12 (12 ports)
J
DTI16 (16 ports)
J
DTI20 (20 ports)
J
DTI24 (24 ports)
H
With an Electra Elite IPK - Basic Port Package, a maximum of 16 T1 trunks can be assigned.
H
With an Electra Elite IPK - Expanded Port Package, up to 64 T1 trunks can be assigned. Two DTI-
U( ) ETUs can provide 24 trunks, and a third DTI-U( ) ETU can provide 16 trunks
(24+24+16=64).
H
With an Electra Elite IPK - Basis Port Package, a maximum of four DTI-U( ) ETUs can be installed.
When four DTI-U( ) ETUs are installed, up to four trunks each can be assigned.
H
With an Electra Elite IPK - Expanded Port Package, a maximum of eight DTI-U( ) ETUs can be
installed. When eight DTI-U( ) ETUs are installed, up to eight trunks each can be assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 82
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
The DTI-U( ) ETU or higher is required to support Feature Group D incoming MF/outgoing DTFM
signaling.
H
The DTI-U30 ETU or higher is required to support K-CCIS.
H
DTI-U( ) ETUs cannot be upgraded to a higher version.
Example:
J
A DTI-U10 ETU cannot be upgraded to a DTI-U20/30 ETU.
J
A DTI-U20 ETU cannot be upgraded to a DTI-U30 ETU.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
A-23
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T1
C-5
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
D-9
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
E-3
E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire)
I-6
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections
I-7
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
M-6
Multiple Trunk Groups
T-2
Tandem Switching of 4-Wire E&M Tie Lines
U-4
Universal Slots
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
¦+AD
Master Clock Selection
1-8-33
¦+AD , T1 Signal Format Selection
1-11-00
¦+AD , Clear Channel Selection
1-11-01
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 83
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-Line
Page-
Shortcut
Key
Line Key
¦+AD
Line Length Selection
1-11-02
¦+AD , T1 Channel Selection
1-11-05
¦+AD
Signaling Selection
1-11-06
¦+AD
DTI Trunk Type Assignment
1-11-07
¦+AD
Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment
1-11-08
¦+BCT
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-03
¦+BCT
Trunk Type Selection
3-91
, When the system is at default this Memory Block must be programmed for the feature to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 84
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Universal Slots
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Electra Elite IPK system, B64-U20 KSU, has eight universal slots and up to three cabinets can be
installed. The system uses the same KSU for the basic and expansion cabinets to support up to 24
Universal Slots.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
Not applicable
Required Components:
None
OPERATING PROCEDURES
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
H
Two software packages (Basic Port Package and Expanded Port Package) are available for
the Electra Elite IPK system using the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU. Refer to the following table for
maximum system capacities for each software package.
Basic Port
Expanded Port
Item
Notes
Package
Package
Basic Terminals (Phones)
32
120
Shared Call Arrival (CAR) Keys with Basic Terminals
24
112
Dedicated Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
40
0
Basic Terminals + Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
72
120
Basic Trunks
16
64
Basic Trunks with MG(8)-U ETU
0
8
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 85
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Basic Port
Expanded Port
Item
Notes
Package
Package
Dedicated Trunks with MG(8)-U ETU
8
0
Trunks + Trunks for MG(8)-U ETU
24
64
IP Terminals (Phones) using IPCA( )-U( ) ETU
30
30
Shared IP Terminals with Basic Terminals
0
30
Dedicated IP Terminals for IPCA( )-U10 ETU
30
0
IP Terminals + Basic Terminals
62
118
Note 1
Universal Slot
24
24
Shared MIF Slots with Universal Slots
2
2
Dedicated MIF Slot
1
1
Note 1: When 29 or 30 IP Terminals are installed with the Expanded Port Package, the system uses 32 ports
from the Basic Terminal capacity.
H
The Basic Port Package does not limit a number of slots. It only limits the number of ports.
H
An ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU with an ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU installed supports 16 Electronic Station
Interface ports. This combination can be installed in any Interface Slot (1~8) of any Cabinet
(1~3) without requiring adjacent slots to be vacant.
H
The DTI-U( ) ETU or PRT(1)-U( ) ETU can be installed in any Interface Slot (1~8) of any
Cabinet (1~3) without requiring adjacent slots to be vacant.
H
The DTI-U( ) ETU can be assigned in Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment) with the
following configurations:
J
DTI4 (4 ports)
J
DTI8 (8 ports)
J
DTI12 (12 ports)
J
DTI16 (16 ports)
J
DTI20 (20 ports)
J
DTI24 (24 ports)
H
The PRT(1)-U( ) ETU can be assigned in Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment) with
the following configurations:
J
PRT4 (4 ports, 4 B channels)
J
PRT8 (8 ports, 8 B channels)
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 86
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
J
PRT12 (12 ports, 12 B channels)
J
PRT16 (16 ports, 16 B channels)
J
PRT20 (20 ports, 20 B channels)
J
PRT24 (24 ports, 23 B channels)
H
The following Memory Blocks are used to assign non-physical station ports and will reduce the
maximum station port capacity:
J
1-2-04 Call Arrival (CAR) Key Block Assignment
J
1-2-21 PS Telephone Block Assignment
J
1-2-32 IP Phone Block Assignment
H
The available interface cards and maximum capacities for Universal Slots with the Electra Elite IPK
system are shown in the following tables.
Maximum Capacities
Station Interface
Description
Notes
Units
Basic Port
Expanded
Package
Port Package
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
8-port Electronic Station Interface
4
15
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU
8-port Electronic Station Interface
4
15
ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU with
16-port Electronic Station Interface
2
7
Note 2
ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
SLI(4)-U( ) ETU
4-port Single Line Interface
6
22
SLI(8)-U( ) ETU
8-port Single Line Interface
3
14
OPX(2)-U( ) ETU
2-port Off-Premise Extension Interface
6
22
Note 3
CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU
2-or 4-port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 3, 4, 5
FMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU
2-or 4-port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 3, 4, 5
FMS(8)-U( ) ETU
8-port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 4, 5
VMS(2)/(4)-U( ) ETU
2-or 4-port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 3, 4, 5
VMS(8)-U( ) ETU
8-port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 4, 5
VP(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
4-or 8-port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 4, 5
VP(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU
12-or 16-port Digital Voice Mail System
1
1
Note 4, 5, 6
CTI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
4-or 8-port Digital CTI System
1
1
Note 4, 5
CTI(12)/(16)-U( ) ETU
12-or 16-port Digital CTI System
1
1
Note 4, 5, 6
ACD(8)-U( ) ETU
8-port ACD System
1
1
Note 5, 7
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 87
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Maximum Capacities
Station Interface
Description
Notes
Units
Basic Port
Expanded
Package
Port Package
CNF(8)-U( ) ETU
8-port Conference Unit
2
2
Note 8, 9
Note 1: Calculating maximum capacities is based on the system having a minimum of 8 Electronic Station
Interface (ESI) ports and 4 Trunk ports.
Note 2: When 7 ESIB(8)-U( ) ETUs with 7 ESIE(8)-U( ) ETUs are installed, 8 additional station ports are
available.
Note 3: When 2-port Station Interface ETUs are installed, the system uses 4 ports from its maximum port
capacity.
Note 4: Only one CMS, FMS, VMS, VP, or CTI system can be installed in one Electra Elite IPK system.
Note 5: In Memory Block 7-2 (Telephone Type Assignment), a maximum of 32 Digital Voice Mail ports are
available.
Note 6: Two physical Interface Slots are used for the EliteMail VP 12/16-port system and the EliteMail CTI 12/
16-port system.
Note 7: In Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment), the ACD(8)-U( ) ETU is assigned as VMS 8 and
Digital VM in Memory Block 7-2 (Telephone Type Assignment).
Note 8: In Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment), the CNF(8)-U( ) ETU is assigned as SLI 8 and
"VM (YS)" in Memory Block 4-35 (Voice Mail/SLT Selection).
Note 9: In Memory Block 4-35 (Voice Mail/SLT Selection), a maximum of 16 analog Voice Mail ports are
available.
Maximum Capacities
Trunk Interface Units
Description
Notes
Basic Port
Expanded
Package
Port Package
COI(4)-U( ) ETU
4-port CO/PBX Line Interface
4
16
COI(8)-U( ) ETU
8-port CO/PBX Line Interface
2
8
COID(4)-U( ) ETU
4-port Caller ID CO/PBX Line Interface
4
16
COID(8)-U( ) ETU
8-port Caller ID CO/PBX Line Interface
3
8
4-port (COI or COID CO/PBX Line
COIB(4)-U( ) ETU
4
16
Interface
8-port (COI or COID CO/PBX Line
COIB(8)-U( ) ETU
2
8
Interface
BRT(4)-U( ) ETU
4-port ISDN Interface for 8 trunks
2
8
DID(4)-U( ) ETU
4-port Direct Inward Dialing Interface
4
18
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 88
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Maximum Capacities
Trunk Interface Units
Description
Notes
Basic Port
Expanded
Package
Port Package
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU
2-port Tie Line Interface
4
16
Note 2
DTI-U( ) ETU
T1/FT1 Trunk Interface
4
8
Note 3, 4
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU
ISDN-Primary Rate Trunk Interface
4
8
Note 3, 4
4-port Voice over Internet Protocol
IPT(4)-U( ) ETU
4
9
Note 5
Trunk Interface
8-port Voice over Internet Protocol
IPT(8)-U( ) ETU
2
3
Note 5
Trunk Interface
MG(8)-U( ) ETU
8-Channel - Media Gateway Unit
1
1
Note 1: Calculating maximum capacities is based on the system having a minimum of 8 Electronic Station
Interface (ESI) ports and 4 Trunk ports.
Note 2: When 2-port Trunk Interface ETUs are installed, the system uses four ports from its maximum port
capacity.
Note 3: With the Basic Port Package, a maximum of four DTI-U( ) ETUs, PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs, or a combination of
both can be installed. When four DTI or PRT ETUs or a combination of both are installed, up to four
trunks each can be assigned.
Note 4: With the Expanded Port Package, a maximum of eight DTI-U( ) ETUs, PRT(1)-U( ) ETUs, or a
combination of both can be installed. When eight DTI or PRT ETUs or a combination of both are installed,
up to eight trunks each can be assigned.
Note 5: A maximum of three IPT(4)/(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed per B64-U20 KSU, due to power supply
requirements.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 89
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Maximum Capacities
Application Interface
Description
Notes
Units
Basic Port
Expanded
Package
Port Package
2-Channel - Base Station Unit for
BSU(2)-U( ) ETU
3
8
Wireless
4-Channel - Common Channel
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU
1
1
Handler (CCH) for K-CCIS
DPH(4)-U( ) ETU
4-Channel - Door Phone Interface Unit
1
1
ECR-U( ) ETU
External Control Relay Unit
1
1
MIFA-U( ) ETU
Multiple Interface Unit for UCD/ACD
1
1
Note 1, 3
MIFM-U( ) ETU
Multiple Interface Unit for Multifunction
1
1
Note 1, 2, 3
PBR( )-U( ) ETU
4-Channel - Push Button Receiver Unit
1
1
4-Channel - Voice Recording Service
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU
2
2
Unit
IPCA( )-U10 ETU
IP CPU Engine
1
1
Note 1: The MIFM-U( ) or MIFA-U( ) ETU must be installed in the ISA slot, slot 1, or slot 2 of the first B64-U20
KSU
Note 2: The MIFM-U( ) ETU has an optional built-in modem that works only when the The MIFM-U( ) ETU is
installed in slot 1 or slot 2 of the first B64-U20 KSU.
Note 3: The MIFA-U( ) ETU (with KMA(1.0)U installed) has an ACD-MIS output that works only when the
MIFA-U( ) ETU is installed in the ISA slot. When ACD-MIS and remote SAT PC programming are
required, install the ACD-MIS in the ISA slot and the MIFM-U( ) ETU in slot S1 or slot S2 of the first
B64-U20 KSU.
H
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK General Description Manual or System Hardware Manual for more
information.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 90
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Restrictions
H
KSU Power-Based ETU Quantity Limitations
The following charts indicate the maximum number of specific ETU combinations in each KSU that
are restricted by power limitations of the KSU.
For System without EliteMail VP/CTI
Maximum NO. of
Either
* NO. of
NO. of
ACD+/CMS/FMC/
EliteMail CTI
Other ETUs
ESI(8) ETUs
ESI Ports
VMS/IPT/SLI/OPX/or
or EliteMail VP
DID ETUs
10
80
0
2
No Limitation
9
72
0
2
No Limitation
8
64
0
3
No Limitation
7
56
0
4
No Limitation
6
48
0
5
No Limitation
5
40
0
5
No Limitation
4
32
0
6
No Limitation
3
24
0
6
No Limitation
2
16
0
7
No Limitation
1
8
0
7
No Limitation
For System with EliteMail VP/CTI
Maximum NO. of
Either
* NO. of
NO. of
ACD+/CMS/FMC/
EliteMail CTI
Other ETUs
ESI(8) ETUs
ESI Ports
VMS/IPT/SLI/OPX/or
or EliteMail VP
DID ETUs
9
72
1
0
No Limitation
8
64
1
0
No Limitation
7
56
1
1
No Limitation
6
48
1
2
No Limitation
5
40
1
2
No Limitation
4
32
1
3
No Limitation
3
24
1
4
No Limitation
2
16
1
4
No Limitation
1
8
1
5
No Limitation
* The number of 8-port ESI ETUs Installed including ESI(8)-U( ) ETU, ESIB(8)-U( ) ETU, or ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 91
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Feature
Feature Name
Number
C-3
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
D-8
Digital Voice Mail
D-9
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
D-17
Door/Monitor Telephone
E-3
E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire)
E-4
Elite ACD Plus
E-12
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
G-1
General Purpose Relays
G-2
Ground Start Trunks
I-6
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections
I-7
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
K-1
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
L-5
Loop Start Trunks
M-4
Multiline Conference Bridge
S-15
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
T-1
T1 Connection
U-2
Unified Messaging
V-1
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
V-3
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
W-6
Wireless
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 92
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
1-8-07
1-8-08
Order
Memory
Attendant
Station
and
System Data Name
Function
Block
Page-
Page-
Shortcut
Line Key
Line Key
¦+BS
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-1
¦+BS
Telephone Type Assignment
7-2
¦+BK
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-04
¦+AP
PS Telephone Block Assignment
1-2-21
¦+AH
IP Phone Block Assignment
1-2-32
¦+BTI
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
4-35
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
3 - 93
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 94
Electra Elite IPK Features and
Specifications for K-CCIS
Features and Specifications for
Electra Elite IPK K-CCIS
___________________________________________________________________________________
Centralized Billing (K-CCIS)
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
This feature sends the billing information from local systems to a billing center office for central
management of all billing information within the network. The Electra Elite IPK can send billing
information to a billing center office (NEAX2000/2400), but cannot receive the billing information as the
billing center office.
For more details, refer to the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components
DTI-U30 ETU (or higher)
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU (firmware version 2.0 or higher)
CLKG-U( ) Unit (Phase Lock Oscillator)
MIFM-U( ) ETU (firmware version 5.00 or higher)
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Not Applicable
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
4 - 1
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
Ë
The Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) feature and Centralized Billing Feature can be
used at the same time.
Ë
Centralized Billing (K-CCIS) feature supports the following types of calls:
H
Incoming CO Calls (using the main system and another system trunk/K-CCIS trunk)
H
Outgoing CO Call (using the main system and another system trunk/K-CCIS trunk)
Restrictions:
Ë
An MIFM-U( ) with firmware version 5.00 or higher is required for every Electra Elite IPK system in
the network that needs to send the billing information to the billing center office.
Ë
Station-to-station calls in their own system are not reported to the billing center office with Electra
Elite IPK.
Ë
The information storage capacity of the local Electra Elite IPK office is approximately 300 calls.
When the K-CCIS link is down due to network trouble, the billing information is stored by the
MIFM-U( ) ETU. When the maximum calls exceed this amount, the oldest call information is
overwritten by the latest (newest) call.
Ë
With the Electra Elite IPK, trunk type (analog/ISDN, etc.) information is not reported to the billing
center office.
Ë
When the K-CCIS link is down due to network trouble, the Electra Elite IPK system does not
provide and SMDR alarm indication to station ports 01 and 02.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Ë
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified
Ë
Account Code Entry
Ë
Authorization Code
Ë
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change (K-CCIS)
Ë
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Ë
Voice Mail Integration (K-CCIS)
___________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 2
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
This guide provides a list of associated Memory Blocks that support this feature.
For Centralized Billing Installation
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
7-1
Card Interface Slot
Select the following:
Page 4, LK2
Refer to Electra Elite
Assignment
H
Cabinet Number (1~3) CCH(4)-U10
IPK Programming
H
Lower Slot (01~08)
Manual for all options
H
Setting Data to be
Page 3, LK8
and default settings.
assigned
MIFM-U10
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
Find the associated port
Associated Port
number from MB 7-1 for
(01 or 02)
MIFM-U10 ETU.
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office
Activate K-CCIS using this
LK1 = None
Either Main or
(Required)
Selection
setting.
LK2 = Main
Remote can be
LK3 = Remote
selected for
= Default
Centralized Billing.
1-15-05
Destination Point Code
Select the table (001~255).
Point Code:
This Memory Block
Transfer Assignment
(00001~16367)
must be assigned for
tandem offices and is
CCH Channel:
used for Centralized
(1~4)
Billing (K-CCIS)
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/
Select this Memory Block if LK1 = Deny
(Required)
Deny Selection
Centralized Billing is
LK2 = Allow
provided.
= Default
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point of
Select the CCH Channel
Center Office Code
(Required)
Code of Center Office
(1~4).
(00001~16367)
Assignment
Default = Blank
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
4 - 3
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
For Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Installation
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
Select timeout.
LK1 = 10 seconds
LK2 = 20 seconds
LK3 = 30 seconds
LK4 = 40 seconds
LK5 = 50 seconds
LK6 = 60 seconds
LK7 = 70 seconds
LK8 = 2 seconds
= Default
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
Print all digits or mask the
LK1 = All
last four digits.
LK2 = Mask
= Default
For Centralized Billing (K-CCIS)
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
Select No or Yes
LK1 = No
LK2 = Yes
= Default
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control
Select Yes or NO
LK1 = Yes
Selection
LK2 = No
= Default
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time
Enter timeout.
Time Assignment:
Time assignment can
Assignment
00~99 (000~999)
be set from 000~999
seconds
seconds in increments
Default = 040 seconds
of 10.
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing
Select type of calls to be
LK1 = All Calls
Print Selection
printed.
LK2 = Outgoing
Calls
LK3 = Incoming Calls
= Default
___________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 4
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
For Centralized Billing (K-CCIS) (Continued)
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Enter the COM port.
Baud Rate:
COM3 is not used.
Assignment
LK1 = 4.8 Kbps
LK2 = 9.6 Kbps
LK3 = 19.2 Kbps
LK4 = 38.4 Kbps
Default Values:
COM1 = 38.4
COM2 = 4.8
COM3 = 4.8
COM4 = 9.6
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print
Select station ports (01~C0) LK1 = Yes
Selection
to be assigned.
LK2 = No
= Default
Refer to Chapter 3 System Data Programming for detailed K-CCIS network programming instructions.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
4 - 5
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change (K-CCIS)
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
This feature switches the Day/Night mode of a remote office that is linked to a main office using K-CCIS,
in accordance with the Day/Night mode switching from an Attendant Position at the main office.
When an Electra Elite IPK system is connected to another Electra Elite IPK system, a main office can
control remote offices.
When connected to a NEAX2400, the Electra Elite IPK can only be used as a remote office.
For more details, refer to the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components
DTI-U30 ETU (or higher)
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU (firmware version 2.0 or higher)
CLKG-U( ) Unit (Phase Lock Oscillator)
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To set or cancel Night Transfer system-wide from an Attendant Position:
Main Office: A
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial Access Code HK.
A
3.
Press
.
- OR -
1.
Press the Night Transfer key on the Attendant Add-On Console.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 6
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Remote Office:
No manual operation is required.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
Ë
A maximum of 16 remote offices can be controlled by one main office.
Ë
If Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching is assigned in the main office, all remote offices will change
the mode, if assigned.
Ë
If the remote office is to be restricted from overriding the Day/Night Mode setting, the following
Memory Blocks should be assigned:
H
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
(Page 1, LK1 = Deny)
Selection 1
(Page 2, LK2 = Deny)
H
1-1-27
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching
Not assigned
Time Assignment
H
1-1-32
Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of
Not assigned
Week Selection
H
1-6-05
Attendant Add-On Console Key
Delete Night Mode
Selection
Switching Key
The remote office an override the Day/Night Mode setting if allowed in any of the system data
assignments listed above.
Ë
If the remote office is in Night Mode [as assigned in the Centralized Billing (K-CCIS) feature],
normal Night Mode indications are provided.
The Night Mode indication is first character on the second row of the Multiline Terminal LCD. Any Feature
Access keys assigned for Night Mode transfer or the Night Mode key on the Attendant console are lit.)
Ë
If the K-CCIS link is not available due to network trouble, the Electra Elite IPK main office resends
the K-CCIS Day/Night Mode switch command every 16 minutes.
Restrictions:
Ë
Centralized Day/Night Mode switching from a main office can only send a system-wide K-CCIS
Day/Night mode switch command. Individual Tenant Mode switching is not supported.
Ë
When an Electra Elite IPK receives the K-CCIS Day/Night Mode switch command from a main
office, the remote office will change all tenants to the requested mode.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
4 - 7
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Ë
Memory Block 1-15-05 (Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment) must be set for all tandem
offices for the Centralized Day/Night Mode feature.
Ë
A NEAX2000 cannot be used as a main office or a tandem office for the Centralized Day/Night
Mode Change (K-CCIS) feature.
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Ë
Assigned Night Answer (ANA)
Ë
Authorization Code
Ë
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching
Ë
Centralized Billing (K-CCIS)
Ë
Code Restriction
Ë
Dial Access to Attendant (K-CCIS)
Ë
Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
Ë
Flexible Ringing Assignment
Ë
Night Call Pickup
Ë
Night Chime
Ë
Night Transfer
Ë
Voice Mail Integration (K-CCIS)
___________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 8
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
This guide provides a list of associated Memory Blocks that support this feature.
For Centralized Billing Day/Night Mode Change Installation
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office
Activate K-CCIS using this
LK1 = None
Either Main or
(Required)
Selection
setting.
LK2 = Main
Remote can be
LK3 = Remote
selected for
= Default
Centralized Day/Night
Switching.
1-15-05
Destination Point Code
Select a table (001~255).
Point Code:
This Memory Block
Transfer Assignment
(00001~16367)
must be assigned for
tandem offices and is
CCH Channel:
used for Centralized
(1~4)
Billing (K-CCIS).
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night
Select if Centralized Day/
LK1 = Deny
(Required)
Switching for Remote Office
Nigh Switching for Remote LK2 = Allow
Assignment
Office is provided.
= Default
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night
Select a table (01~16).
Point code:
(Required)
Switching for Main Office
(00001~16367)
Assignment
CCH Channel:
(1~4)
For Night Transfer Feature
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
1-1-27
Automatic Day/Night Mode
Select either Pattern 1 or
Day Mode Start Time
The time is entered
Switching Time Assignment
Pattern 2.
Setting
using a 24-hour clock.
Night Mode Start Time
Setting
1-1-32
Automatic Day/Night Mode
Select either Pattern 1 or
LK1 = Sunday
Off = Day/Night
by Day of Week Selection
Pattern 2.
LK2 = Monday
Automatic Switching
LK3 = Tuesday
Pattern 1
LK4 = Wednesday
LK5 = Thursday
On = Day/Night
LK6 = Friday
Automatic Switching
LK7 = Saturday
Pattern 2
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
4 - 9
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
For Night Transfer Feature
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
1-6-05
Attendant Add-On Console
Select the DSS No. (1~4)
Page 2, LK4
Refer to the Electra
Key Selection
and the Button Number
Night Mode Key
Elite IPK
(01~60) and assign the
Programming Manual
appropriate data.
for all options and
default settings.
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant)
Night Mode Switching
Page 1, LK1
Feature Selection 1
(system-wide)
On = Allow
Off = Deny
Night Mode Switching
(tenant)
Page 1, LK2
On = Allow
On = Deny
= Default
2-01
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
Select Tenants (00~47) to
Page 1
Refer to the Electra
be assigned.
LK1 = Trunk 01
Elite IPK
LK2 = Trunk 02
Programming Manual
LK3 = Trunk 03
for all options and
LK4 = Trunk 04
default settings.
LK5 = Trunk 05
LK6 = Trunk 06
LK7 = Trunk 07
LK8 = Trunk 08
4-09
Telephone to Tenant
Select station ports (01~C0) Tenant Number
Assignment
to be assigned.
(00~47)
Default = Tenant 00
4-12
Line Key Selection for
Select station ports (01~C0) Page 1, LK6
Refer to the Electra
Telephone Mode
and line keys to be
Feature Access Code
Elite IPK
assigned.
(01~16)
Programming Manual
for all options and
default settings.
4-17
Station to Class of Service
Select station ports (01~C0) Assign the appropriate Refer to the Electra
Feature Assignment
and class type (1 or 2) to be class (00~15).
Elite IPK
assigned.
Programming Manual
for all options and
default settings.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 10
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Dial Access to Attendant (K-CCIS)
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
This feature allows a station user to call an Attendant by dialing an operation call code through the K-
CCIS network.
For more details, refer to the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
DTI-U30 ETU
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU
CLKG-U( ) Unit (Phase Lock Oscillator)
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To call an Attendant Position:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
.
2.
Dial K(or the operator call doe if it is different from K).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
Ë
The operator call code must be an individual Attendant Access Code number.
Ë
When a call is made to an Electra Elite IPK Attendant Position, the Electra Elite IPK sends OPR
XXX to the call originator as the name information.
XXX = Station Number of the Attendant Position.
Ë
When an Open Numbering Plan is used, and a call is made to an Electra Elite IPK Attendant
Position, the operator office code is included with the name information.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
4 - 11
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Ë
When making a call from an Electra Elite IPK Attendant Position across a K-CCIS network, the
Caller ID Name and Number display is the same as a station-to-station call.
Ë
This feature is also available when the Attendant Console is in a NEAX2000 IVS2 or NEAX2400 in
the CCIS network.
Ë
When an Electra Elite IPK station calls a NEAX Desk Console Attendant Position, OPR is
displayed on the LCD during the incoming ring. When using an Open Number Plan, the office
code of the Desk Console is also displayed.
Ë
The following can be used for the Dial Access to Attendant (K-CCIS) feature:
H
Specified Station Access Code (00~23) in Memory Block 1-2-08 (Specified Station Access
Code Assignment)
H
Specified Station Access Codes (00~23, Function #176~199)
H
Memory Blocks 1-1-46/47/49 (Access Code 1/2/3-Digit Assignment)
Ë
In an Open Numbering Plan network, a station can call an Attendant within the K-CCIS network by
dialing 0.
Ë
In an Open Numbering Plan network, a station can call an Attendant within the K-CCIS network by
dialing: Access Code + Office Code + 0.
Restrictions:
Ë
When a PBX is in Night MOde, calls to a NEAX Desk Console are restricted. When an Electra
Elite IPK station calls a NEAX Desk Console Attendant Position that is set to Night Mode, Error is
displayed in the calling station LCD and the call is rejected.
Ë
When a NEAX Desk Console Attendant Position calls an Electra Elite IPK station, the Electra Elite
IPK station does not store the call in the Caller ID Scrolling feature. This call record can be printed
on SMDR without Caller ID information.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 12
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
RELATED FEATURE LIST ATTENDANT POSITIONS
Ë
Calling Name Display (K-CCIS)
Ë
Calling Number Display (K-CCIS)
Ë
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change (K-CCIS)
Ë
Dial 0 of Attendant
Ë
Voice Calls (K-CCIS)
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
This guide provides a list of associated Memory Blocks that support this feature.
For Main System
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
1-1-46
Access Code (1/2/3-Digit)
Assign the Access Code for Dial No./Function No.
Refer to the Electra
1-1-47
Assignment
related functions.
X = 176
Elite IPK
1-1-48
Programming Manual
Specified Station
for all options and
Access Code = 00
default settings.
1-2-08
Specified Station Access
Select the specified Station Enter station ports
Code Assignment
Access Code (00~23) to be (01~C0) to be
assigned.
assigned.
Default = Not Assigned
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
4 - 13
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
For Main System (Continued)
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station)
Select Class No. (00~15)
Page 4, LK3
Refer to the Electra
(Required)
Feature Selection 2
and assign the appropriate
ANI/Caller ID
Elite IPK
data.)
On = Allow
Programming Manual
Off = Deny
for all options and
default settings.
Page 4, LK4
ANI/Caller ID Number
Selection
On = Allow
Off = Deny
Page 5, LK7
ANI/Caller ID Display
Selection
On = Allow
Off = Deny
Page 6, LK5
Caller ID for K-CCIS
On = Allow
Off = Deny
= Default
For Remote System
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
1-1-46
Access Code (1/2/3-Digit)
Assign Access Codes for
Dial No./Function No.
Refer to the Electra
1-1-47
Assignment
related functions.
X = 604
Elite IPK
1-1-48
ARS Table 4
Programming Manual
(Required)
for all options and
default settings.
1-14-01
ARS Dialing Assignment
Select the ARS Table (1~4) Enter up to 8 digits.
(Required)
number and enter and enter
the Dial Number (01~128).
Default = Not Assigned
1-14-02
ARS Dial Allow/Deny
Select the ARS Table (1~4) LK1 = Yes (Allow)
Selection
and enter the Dial Number
LK2 = No (Deny)
(01~128).
= Default
___________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 14
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
For Remote System (Continued)
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
1-14-03
ARS Route Table Number
Select the ARS Table (1~4) Enter the Route No.
Route 00 = Not Used
(Required)
Assignment
and enter the Dial Number
(00, 01~32)
(01~128).
Default = 00
1-14-04
ARS Trunk Group to Route
Select the ARS Route No.
LK1 = Normal
(Required)
Number Assignment
(01~32).
LK2 = TG (01~32)
LK5 = RAB (01~16)
LK6 = ICM
= Default
1-14-05
ARS Digit Delete Assignment Select the ARS Route
Enter the number of
(01~32).
digits to delete (00~10).
Default = 00
1-14-06
ARS Digit Add Assignment
Select the ARS Route
Enter up to 10 digits to
(01~32).
add.
Default = 00
1-14-07
ARS Max Digit Assignment
Select the ARS Route
Enter the maximum
(Required)
(01~32).
digits (00~99).
Default - 24
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/
Select the CCH Channel
LK1 = No
(Required)
Deny Selection
(1~4).
LK2 = Yes
= Default
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
4 - 15
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Example
Electra Elite IPK
Electra Elite IPK
Electra Elite IPK
T1
T1
DTI
CCIS
DTI
DTI
CCIS
DTI
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Slot 1
TG10
TG10 Slot 1
Slot 4
TG11
TG11 Slot 1
System A
System B
System C
(100's)
(200's)
(300's)
(Attendant) 100
System A (100's)
System B (200's)
System C (300's)
MB 1-1-46
0=176
MB 1-1-46
0=604 (ARS Table 4)
MB 1-1-46
0=604 (ARS Table 4)
MB 1-2-08
00=Tel 100
MB 1-14-01 Table 4, No. 01=0
MB 1-14-01 Table 4, No. 01=0
MB 1-14-02 Table 4, No. 01=Yes
MB 1-14-02 Table 4, No. 01=Yes
MB 1-14-03 Table 4, No. 01=RT 01
MB 1-14-03 Table 4, No. 01=RT 01
MB 1-14-04 RT No. 01=TG 10
MB 1-14-04 RT No. 01=TG 10
MB 1-14-05 RT No. 01=Delete 00
MB 1-14-05 RT No. 01=Delete 00
MB 1-14-06 RT No. 01=Add None
MB 1-14-06 RT No. 01=Add None
MB 1-14-07 RT No. 01=Max Digit 01
MB 1-14-07 RT No. 01=Max Digit 01
___________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 16
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Paging Access (K-CCIS)
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
This feature allows a user to access external paging equipment from a remote site across the K-CCIS
network. Local stations where the external paging equipment is installed can use the Meet-Me Answer
feature to answer the page and establish a station-to-station K-CCIS call.
For more details, refer to the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
Terminal Type:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Components:
DTI-U30 ETU
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU (firmware version 2.0 or higher)
CLKG-U( ) Unit (Phase Lock Oscillator)
ECR-U( ) ETU (for Zone Paging)
OPERATING PROCEDURES
To access external paging equipment through a K-CCIS network:
E
1.
Lift the handset or press
.
2.
Dial the Access Code for the required zone, or press the programmed Feature Access or
One-Touch key.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
4 - 17
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SERVICE CONDITIONS
General:
Ë
The single external paging zone output built into the basic B64-U20 KSU can be used for Paging
Access (K-CCIS).
Ë
Memory Block 1-7-06 (External Paging Timeout Selection) applies to Paging Access (K-CCIS).
Ë
When a user dials during Paging Access (K-CCIS), DTMF tones are heard from the external
paging equipment at the remote site.
Restrictions:
Ë
Amplifiers and speakers must be locally provided.
Ë
The following Feature Access Codes are not supported over K-CCIS:
H
All Internal Zone Paging (Function Number 070)
H
Internal Zone A/B/C Paging (Function Numbers 071, 072, 073)
H
All Internal/External Zone Paging (Function Number 081)
RELATED FEATURE LIST
Ë
Background Music Over External Speakers
Ë
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
___________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 18
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
This guide provides a list of associated Memory Blocks that support this feature.
For Paging Installation
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
7-1
Card Interface Slot
Select:
Page 4, LK2
Assignment
Cabinet Number (1~3)
CCH(4)-U10
Lower Sot (01~08)
Setting Data to be assigned Page 2, LK8
ECR-U10
1-1-46
Access Code (1/2/3-Digit)
Assign Access Codes for
Dial No./Function No.
1-1-47
Assignment
related functions.
5,=074
1-1-48
(Internal/External
Meet-Me)
55=075
(All External Zone
Paging)
56=076
(External Zone A
Paging)
57=077
(External Zone B
Paging)
58=078
(External Zone C
Paging)
5#=079
(External Meet-Me)
59=081
(All Internal/External
Zone Paging)
Defaults are shown
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
4 - 19
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
For Paging Installation
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
1-7-02
External Speaker Connection Specify if external speakers LK1=EXP A
Selection
are connected.
LK2=ESP B
LK3=ESP C
LED Off =No
LED On=Yes
Default = All On
1-7-03
External Paging Alert Tone
Specify if a paging alert
LK1=Yes
Selection
tone is sent on External
LK2=No
Zone Paging.
= Default
1-7-06
External Paging Timeout
Select timeout.
LK1=0.5 minutes
Selection
LK2=1.0 minute
LK3=1.5 minutes
LK4=2.0 minutes
LK5=3.0 minutes
LK6=5.0 minutes
LK7=8.0 minutes
LK8=No Limit
= Default
1-7-08
External Speaker Chime
Specify the paging alert
LK1=PRT
Selection
tone.
LK2=C-S
LK3=C-B
= Default
1-7-09
External Speaker Chime Start Specifies the delay time (in LK1=000 msec.
Time Selection
milliseconds).
LK2=100 msec.
LK3=200 msec.
LK4=300 msec.
LK5=400 msec.
LK6=500 msec.
LK7=600 msec.
LK8=700 msec.
= Default
4-12
Line Key Selection for
Select station ports (01~C0) Page 1, LK6
Telephone Mode
and line keys to be
Feature Access
assigned.
(01~16)
___________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 20
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
For Remote System
Memory
Description/
System Data Name
Assigned Data
Comments
Block
Selection
1-1-46
Access Code (1/2/3-Digit)
Assign Access Codes for
Dial No./Function No.
Refer to the Electra
1-1-47
Assignment
related functions.
X=604 (ARS Table 4)
Elite IPK
1-1-48
Programming Manual
(Required)
for all options and
default settings.
1-14-01
ARS Dialing Assignment
Select the ARS Table (1~4) Enter up to 8 digits.
(Required)
and enter the Dial Number
Default = Not Assigned
(01~128).
1-14-02
ARS Dial Allow/Deny
Select the ARS Table (1~4) LK1=Yes (Allow)
Selection
and enter the Dial Number
LK2=No (Deny)
(01~128).
= Default
1-14-03
ARS Route Table Number
Select the ARS TAble (1~4) Enter the Route
Route 00 = Not Used
(Required)
Assignment
and enter the Dial Number
Number (00, 01~33)
(01~128).
Default = 00
1-14-04
ARS Trunk Group to Route
Select the ARS Route
LK1=Normal
(Required)
Number Assignment
(01~32).
LK2=TG (01~32)
LK5=RAB (01~16)
LK6=ICM
= Default
1-14-05
ARS Digit Delete Assignment Select the ARS Route
Enter the number of
(01~32).
digits to delete (00~10).
Default = 00
1-14-06
ARS Digit Add Assignment
Select the ARS Route
Enter up to 10 digits to
(01~32).
add.
Default = 00
1-14-07
ARS Max Digit Assignment
Select the ARS Route
Enter the maximum
(Required)
(01~32).
number of digits
(00~99).
Default = 24
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
4 - 21
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Example
Electra Elite IPK
Electra Elite IPK
Electra Elite IPK
T1
T1
ECR
DTI
CCIS
DTI
DTI
CCIS
DTI
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Slot 1
TG10
TG10 Slot 1
Slot 4
TG11
TG11 Slot 1
System A
System B
System C
(100's)
(200's)
(300's)
100
200
300
System A (100's)
System B (200's)
System C (300's)
MB 1-1-47
55=075
MB 1-1-46
5=604 (ARS Table 4)
MB 1-1-46
5=604 (ARS Table 4)
(All External Zone Paging)
MB 1-14-01 Table 4, No. 01=55
MB 1-14-01 Table 4, No. 01=55
MB 1-14-02 Table 4, No. 01=Yes
MB 1-14-02 Table 4, No. 01=Yes
MB 1-14-03 Table 4, No. 01=RT 01
MB 1-14-03 Table 4, No. 01=RT 01
MB 1-14-04 RT No. 01=TG 10
MB 1-14-04 RT No. 01=TG 10
MB 1-14-05 RT No. 01=Delete 00
MB 1-14-05 RT No. 01=Delete 00
MB 1-14-06 RT No. 01=Add None
MB 1-14-06 RT No. 01=Add None
MB 1-14-07 RT No. 01=Max Digit 02
MB 1-14-07 RT No. 01=Max Digit 02
___________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 22
PROGRAMMING
Programming
___________________________________________________________________________________
The Memory Blocks listed in this section are new or modified Memory Blocks for Electra Elite
IPK Release 1000 software.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 1
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a 1-digit number as an Access Code or station
1
number.
Data No.
Display
Dial
46
No.
Data
Function
0~9
PC Programming
No.
Title
No.
* #
¦+BA
4 6 : 1 D G
( 0 ) = 1 7 6
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + DF to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the options using the dial pad.
Default Values
Use the following when entering data:
Function
J
Dial No.
Function Name
to move the cursor left
No.
L to move the cursor right
K
176
Specified Intercom Call
K~I to enter numeric data
A C
~
001
Station Number
D G
~
000
Not Used
H
102
Trunk Group 2
I
101
Trunk Group 1
J
096
Last Number Redial
L
026
Callback Message Answer
4
Enter the Function Number for the Dial Number. Refer to the table on the following pages for a complete list.
G
5
Press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
G
6
Program each Dial No., and press
after the last Dial No. to display the next Memory Block.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 2
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
1.
Select options from the list of function numbers in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment], and
assign a number (from 0~9), ,, or # to each selected function.
H When a function is assigned a 1-digit Access Code, 2-digit Access Codes with the same first digit become
invalid (i.e., if a function is assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes 50~59, 5,, and 5# cannot be used).
B
2.
To enter # or , as part of an Access Code, press
then L or J.
3.
This Memory Block is used when a 2- or 3-Digit Station Numbering Plan is programmed.
This table applies to Data Numbers 46, 47, and 48.
Default
Function
Default
Function
Function Name
Function Name
Dial No.
No.
Dial No.
No.
4, 5, 6, 7
000
Not Used
034
Call Forward - All Call Cancel from
Destination
1, 2, 3
001
Station Number
035
Station Outgoing Lockout Set
002
Not Used
036
Station Outgoing Lockout Cancel
~
~
037
Change Password
019
Not Used
038
Reset Password from Attendant
020
Call Forward - No Answer Set
039
Fax Status Indication (Tie/DID lines)
021
Call Forward - No Answer Cancel
040
Log - ON/OFF
022
Call Forward - Busy Set
041
Account Code Entry
023
Call Forward - Busy Cancel
67
042
Call Pickup Direct
43
024
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Set
043
Not Used
44
025
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer
044
Timed Alarm Set at SLTs
Cancel
045
Timed Alarm Cancel at SLTs
#
026
Callback Message Answer
046
Set and Cancel of Timed Alarm for
6#
027
SLT Hookflash/DVM Hookflash
Single Line Telephone from
028
Not Used
Attendant
029
Not Used
4,
047
Call Park System Transfer
41
030
Call Forward - All Call Set
4#
048
Call Park System Answer
40
031
DND Set
60
049
Volume/LCD Control
42
032
Call Forward - All Call/DND Cancel
050
Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/
Centrex Line Seizure (1-digit)
033
Call Forward - All Call Set from
Destination
051
Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/
Centrex Line Seizure (2-digit)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 3
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Default
Function
Default
Function
Function Name
Function Name
Dial No.
No.
Dial No.
No.
052
Call Pickup CO/PBX by Tenant
55
075
All External Zone Paging
(1-digit)
56
076
External Zone A Paging
053
Call Pickup CO/PBX/Centrex by
Tenant (2-digit)
57
077
External Zone B Paging
054
Specified Tenant Internal Paging
58
078
External Zone C Paging
(1-digit)
5#
079
External Meet-Me
055
Specified Tenant Internal Paging
080
Outgoing (CO only) Access in Same
(2-digit)
Tenant
056
Internal Emergency All Call Paging
59
081
All Internal/External Zone Paging
68
057
Intra-Tenant Call Pickup
082
System I. D. Number for Tie Line
69
058
Night Chime Call Pickup
Networking
059
Not Used
083 Not
Used
060
Call Pickup CO/PBX for other
~
~
Tenants
085
Not Used
061
Internal/CO/PBX Transfer Call
Pickup in Same Tenant
086
Tie Line Seizure in Same Tenant
062
SLT Park to Non-Exclusive Hold
087
PBX Line Seizure in Same Tenant
063
Specified CO/PBX/Centrex Line
78
088
Trunk Queuing Set
Seizure (1-digit)
79
089
Trunk Queuing Cancel
064
Specified CO/PBX/Centrex Line
Seizure (2-digit)
76
090
Station Speed Dial Programming
(Single Line Telephone)
065
Not Used
091
Doorphone 1 Call
6,
066
Call Pickup CO/PBX in Same Tenant
092
Doorphone 2 Call
067
Call Pickup (Tie only) in Same Tenant
093
Doorphone 3 Call
068
Call Pickup (PBX only) in Same
Tenant
094
Doorphone 4 Call
069
Call Pickup (CO only) in Same
77
095
Station/System Speed Dial Call
Tenant
(Single Line Telephone)
51
070
All Internal Zone Paging
,
096
Last Number Redial
52
071
Internal Zone A Paging
097
Not Used
53
072
Internal Zone B Paging
098
DSS 1 CALL
54
073
Internal Zone C Paging
099
DSS 2 CALL
5,
074
Internal/External Meet-Me
100
Not Used
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 4
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Default
Function
Default
Function
Function Name
Function Name
Dial No.
No.
Dial No.
No.
9
101
Trunk Group 01
155
Call Forward - Busy/ No Answer Split
Cancel
8
102
Trunk Group 02
156
Call Forward - All Split Set
70
103
Trunk Group 03
157
Call Forward - All Split Cancel
71
104
Trunk Group 04
158
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Split
72
105
Trunk Group 05
Set for Call Arrival Key (CAR)
73
106
Trunk Group 06
159
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Split
74
107
Trunk Group 07
Cancel for Call Arrival Key (CAR)
75
108
Trunk Group 08
160~175
Not Used
109~132
Trunk Group 09~32
0
176
Specified Station Access Code 00
133~139
Not Used
177
Specified Station Access Code 01
45
140
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Set
178
Specified Station Access Code 02
for Call Arrival Key (CAR)
179
Specified Station Access Code 03
46
141
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer
180
Specified Station Access Code 04
Cancel for Call Arrival Key (CAR)
181
Specified Station Access Code 05
47
142
Call Forward - All Call Set for Call
Arrival Key (CAR)
182
Specified Station Access Code 06
48
143
Call Forward - All Call Cancel for Call
183
Specified Station Access Code 07
Arrival Key (CAR)
184
Specified Station Access Code 08
144
Call Forward - All Split Set for Call
Arrival Key (CAR)
185
Specified Station Access Code 09
145
Call Forward - All Split Cancel for
186
Specified Station Access Code 10
Call Arrival Key (CAR)
187
Specified Station Access Code 11
146
Forced Account Code/Authorization
188
Specified Station Access Code 12
Code
189
Specified Station Access Code 13
147
Forced Account Code/Authorization
Code Access
190
Specified Station Access Code 14
148
Station Relocation
191
Specified Station Access Code 15
150
Call Forward - No Answer Split Set
192
Specified Station Access Code 16
151
Call Forward - No Answer Split
193
Specified Station Access Code 17
Cancel
194
Specified Station Access Code 18
152 Call
Forward
-
Busy
Split
Set
195
Specified Station Access Code 19
153 Call
Forward
-
Busy
Split
Cancel
196
Specified Station Access Code 20
154
Call Forward - Busy/ No Answer Split
Set
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 5
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Default
Function
Default
Function
Function Name
Function Name
Dial No.
No.
Dial No.
No.
197
Specified Station Access Code 21
401
Closed Number Block 1
198
Specified Station Access Code 22
~
~
199
Specified Station Access Code 23
416
Closed Number Block 16
200
Not Used
501
VRS Voice Message Record/Verify/
201~232
Route Advance Block 01~32
Erase (Voice Prompt, Automated
Attendant)
233~250
Not Used
502
Voice Mail Message Set
251
DISA Password Set (Any station)
503
Voice Mail Message Cancel
252
DISA Password Reset (Attendant
only)
601
ARS Table 1
253
DISA Password Confirmation
602
ARS Table 2
(Attendant only)
603
ARS Table 3
254
Not Used
604
ARS Table 4
255
Not Used
301
Third Digit Table Number 01 (2-digit
Numbering Plan can only be
entered.)
~
~
304
Third Digit Table Number 04 (2-digit
Numbering Plan can only be
entered.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 6
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a 2-digit number as an Access Code.
1
Display
Data No.
Dial
No.
47
Data
0~9
Function
No.
Title
* #
No.
PC Programming
4 7 : 2 D G
( 0 0 ) = 0 0 0
¦+BA
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + DG to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the options using the dial pad.
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
4
Enter the Function Number for the Dial Number. Refer to the table in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment].
G
5
Press
to display next dial number in succession.
G
6
After programming last Dial No., press
to display the next Memory Block.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
Notes
1.
Select options from the list of function numbers in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment], and
assign a number (from 00~99), ,, or # to each selected function.
H When a function is assigned a 1-digit Access Code, 2-digit Access Codes with the same first digit become
invalid (i.e., if a function is assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes 50~59, 5,, and 5# cannot be used).
B
2.
To enter # or , as part of an Access Code, press
then L or J.
3.
Use this Memory Block when a 4-Digit Station Numbering Plan is programmed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 7
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a 3-digit number as an Access Code.
1
Display
Data No.
Third
Digit
48
Table
Dial
Data
No.
No.
Function
No.
Title
(01~04)
0~9
No.
PC Programming
¦+BA
4 8 : 3 D G / 0 1 ( 0 ) = 0 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + DH to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the Function No. for Dial No. 0 for Third Digit Table No. 01 using the dial pad.
Default Values
Use the following to enter data:
All Dial 000 (Not Used)
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
B
andJto enter ,
B
andLto enter #
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
G
5
After last Dial No. entry, press
to write the data and display Third Digit Table No. 02, Dial No. 0.
G
6
Enter Function No. for Dial No. 0, and press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
G
7
After last Dial No. entry for Table 02, press
to write the data and display Third Digit Table No. 03, Dial No. 0.
G
8
Enter Function No. for Dial No. 0, and press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
G
9
After last Dial No. entry for Table 03, press
to write the data and display Third Digit Table No. 04.
G
10 Enter Function No. for Dial No. 0, and press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
G
11 After last Dial No. entry for Table 04, press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
12 Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 8
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
1.
Select options from the list of function numbers in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment], and
assign a 3-digit Access Code.
H When a function is assigned a 1-digit Access Code or 2-digit Access Code, 3-digit Access Codes (with the
same first digit) become invalid (i.e., if a function is assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes 50~59, 5 ,,
and 5# cannot be used).
2.
A station number is not assigned in this Memory Block.
3.
All items except function number 001 (Station Number) in 1-digit assignment are valid in this block.
4.
Four groups of Access Code Tables can be used. 0~9, ,, and # are the third digit Access Codes that are
assigned in the third digit tables.
5.
Before using this function, assign function numbers 301~304 (Table No. for third digit) in Memory Block 1-1-47
[Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment].
6.
To program Access Code 811 for Trunk Group 02:
H Use Memory Block 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment] to assign function 301 to 81.
H Set Third Digit Table No. 01 dial number 1 to function 102.
Numbering Plan (2-Digit)
Dial No.
Function Number
81
301 (3rd Dgt Table 01)
82
302 (3rd Dgt Table 02)
83
303 (3rd Dgt Table 03)
84
304 (3rd Dgt Table 04)
Numbering Plan (3-Digit)
3rd Digit Table No. 01
Dial No.
Function Number
0
101 (Trunk Group 01)
1
102 (Trunk Group 02)
2
103 (Trunk Group 03)
3
104 (Trunk Group 04)
4
105 (Trunk Group 05)
~
~
9
110 (Trunk Group 10)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 9
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-2-04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of Call Arrival keys that can be used in
2
the system.
Data No.
Display
04
Data
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Title
Data
¦+BK
0 4 : C A R
A S S I G N | 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1Ports 01~32
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 01~04
Port 05~08
Port 09~12
Port 13~16
Port 17~20
Port 21~24
Port 25~28
Port 29~32
Page 2 Ports 33~64
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 33~36
Port 37~40
Port 41~44
Port 45~48
Port 49~52
Port 53~56
Port 57~60
Port 61~64
Default: No Call
Arrival Key
Page 3 Ports 65~96
Blocks are
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
assigned.
Port 65~68
Port 69~72
Port 73~76
Port 77~80
Port 81~84
Port 85~88
Port 89~92
Port 93~96
Page 4 Ports 97~CO
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 97~A0
Port A1~A4
Port A5~A8
Port A9~B2
Port B3~B6
Port B7~C0
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + KDto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Default Values
LK is green = block assigned for CAR
No Call Arrival Key Blocks are assigned.
LK is red = block not available for CAR (hardware is installed)
Hardware equipped ports are red.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 10
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
1.
The Electra Elite IPK system allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI, FMS/VMS,
and OPX) and Call Arrival Keys. When 32 station ports are being used, 88 remain for use as Call Arrival Keys.
2.
The Electra Elite IPK Basic Port Package system can contain 64 Call Arrival keys. This number includes 40
dedicated CAR keys and 24 Shared CAR keys. When 64 CAR keys are assigned, eight port numbers can be
assigned for hardware extension numbers.
3.
The Electra Elite IPK Expanded Port Package system can provide 112 Call Arrival keys. This number is shared
with 120 station ports.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 11
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-2-32
IP Phone Block Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of IP Phones that can be used with the
2
IPCA( )-U10 ETU (CPU board).
Data No.
32
NEW
PC Programming
¦+AH
Display
Data
Setting Data
Title
No.
Data 00~99
3 2 : I P
A S S I G N
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1 Ports 01~32
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 01~04
Port 05~08
Port 09~12
Port 13~16
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 17~20
Port 21~24
Port25~28
Port 29~32
Page 2 Ports 33~64
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 33~36
Port 37~40
Port 41~44
Port 45~48
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 49~52
Port 53~56
Port 57~60
Port 61~64
Page 3 Ports 65~96
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 65~68
Port 69~72
Port73~76
Port 77~80
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 81~84
Port 85~88
Port 89~92
Port93~96
Page 4 Ports 97~CO
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 97~A0 Port A1~A4 Port A5~A8 Port A9~B2
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 12
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Port B3~B6 PortB7~CO
LED Status
Off
On (Green)
On (Red)
Default is shaded, and no IP
Block Not
Phone Blocks are Assigned
Data
Not Assigned
IP Assigned)
Available
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + 32 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Data option.
LK Off Not Assigned
LK Green Block Assigned for IP Phone
LK Red Block not available for IP Phone
C
Press
to go to the next page.
A
Press
to return to the previous page.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
1-2-04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-21
PS Telephone Block Assignment
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-40
LCR Class Selection
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
4-67
IP Station Number Assignment
4-68
LCD Line Key Name Assignment
Notes
The Elite IPK system allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI, FMS/VMS, and
OPX), Call Arrival keys, PS and IP Telephones. When 100 station ports are being used, 20 remain for use as IP
Telephones.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 13
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
System Mode
Selection 1
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to allow or deny specific attendant features for each Class Of
Data No.
Service. When individual stations are assigned, the station user can access only the
07
features designated as allow.
PC Programming
Display
Class
Page
¦+BTS
Data
No.
No.
No.
Title
(00~15)
(1~3)
0 7 : C L S 1
( 0 0 )
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Automatic
Automated
Night Mode
System
Trunk-to-
Night Mode
Attendant/
Switching Per
Speed Dial
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Trunk
Switching
DISA Set/
Tenant
Programming
Transfer Set/
Reset Mode
Reset
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Forced
Default not
Timed Alarm Call Forward
Password
System-Wide
Account
assigned.
for Single
Set/Cancel
(Outgoing
DISA
DISA
Weekend
Reset
Code/
Line
from
Restriction)
Password
Password
Mode Per
Refer to Note
Authorization
Telephone
Destination
Refer to Note
Cancel
Confirmation
Tenant
1
Code
Set/Reset
Station
2
Programming
Page 3
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Terminal
Exchange
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Mode Set
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 14
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + KG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to enter data.
The LED indication changes to indicate the data each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line Key LED
The shaded area indicates
the default setting.
Data
Deny
Allow
Use the following when entering data:
C
Press
to go to the next page
A
Press
to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
key. Data for Class 01 ~ 15 is displayed successively.
G
5
Press
to write the data for Class 15. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
Notes
1.
System-Wide Reset selection resets the following: Call Forward - All Call, Do Not Disturb, Customized Message,
and Callback Request.
2.
Password (Outgoing Restriction) selection cancels Station Lockout and default password for another station.
3.
Sixteen Classes (00 ~ 15) of feature restriction patterns allow a station user to activate particular features while
restricting others.
4.
At default, stations 100 and 101 are in class 00. All other stations are in class 15.
5.
Stations are assigned to a Class of Service in Memory Block 4-17 (Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 15
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Classes 00 ~ 15 are programmed in this Memory Block as feature restriction classes. In Memory Block 4-17 (Station to
Class of Service Feature Assignment) specify any class of service for each telephone to assign features the user can/
cannot activate.
Corresponding
Default
Default
CO/PBX Line
Function Name
Class 00
Class 01 ~ 15
Key
Page 1
LK1
Night Mode Switching (System-Wide))
Allow
Deny
LK2
Night Mode Switching (Tenant)
Allow
Deny
LK3
System Speed Dial Programming
Allow
Deny
LK4
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK5
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK6
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK7
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Set/Reset) and programming of
Allow
Deny
Outgoing Numbers
LK8
Automated Attendant/DISA Mode (Set/Reset)
Allow
Deny
Page 2
LK1
Timed Alarm (Set/Reset) for Single Line Telephones (From Attendant)
Allow
Deny
LK2
Call Forward-All Call (Set/Reset) from Destination Station, Call Forward
Allow
Deny
CAR Keys, Call Forward All Call Set, and Call Forward Busy/No Answer
set
LK3
System-Wide Reset of Timed Alarm, Call Forward-All Call, Do Not
Deny
Deny
Disturb, Customized Message, and Callback Request
LK4
Cancel Station Lockout and Default Password for another Station
Allow
Deny
LK5
DISA Password Cancel
Allow
Deny
LK6
DISA Password Confirmation
Allow
Deny
LK7
Automated Attendant Weekend Mode (Set/Reset) Tenant
Allow
Deny
LK8
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Programming
Allow
Deny
Page 3
LK1
Terminal Exchange Mode Set
Allow
Deny
LK2~LK8
Not Used
N/A
N/A
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 16
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature
System Mode
Selection 2
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to allow or deny specific station features for each Class of
Data No.
Service. When individual stations are assigned, the station user can access only the
08
features specified as allow.
PC Programming
Display
Class
¦+BTS
Data
No.
Page No
No.
Title
(00~15
(1~6)
0 8 : C L S 2
( 0 0 )
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 17
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Voice /
Call Forward -
Barge-In
Timed Alarm
General
Trunk
Automatic
Barge-In
Tone
All Call, DND,
Receive
Set/Cancel
Purpose
Queuing
Callback
(Calling Party)
Override
Break Mode
(Called Party)
From SLT
Relay
(Originate)
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Station
Call Forward -
Absence
Callback
VRS Voice
DISA
Outgoing
Not Used
Busy/No
Not Used
Message
Request Set
Message
Password Set
Lockout Set
Answer Set
Page 3
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
User Ringing
Digit
Voice/Tone
Station Trunk-
Line
LCR/ARS
Account Code
Restriction
Call Alert
Not Used
Override
to-Trunk
Preference
Bypass
Entry
Time
Notification
(Receive)
Transfer
Set/Reset
Selection
Page 4
Default not
assigned.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
DSS Key
ANI/Caller ID
Manual Live
Auto Live
LCR/ARS
BGM
Unsupervised
Transfer
ANI/Caller ID
Number
Record
Record
Recall
Selection
Conference
Operation
Selection
Activate
Activate
Page 5
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Forced
Group
Set Call
Pre-Set
ANI/Caller ID
Account Code
Station
Live
Listening
Forward-Off
Dialing
Display
Not Used
/Authorization
Relocation
Monitoring
Selection
Premise
Allow/Deny
Selection
Code
Page 6
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Unverified for
VMS
Forced
Caller ID for
ARS Overflow
Message
Account Code
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
K-CCIS
Indication
/Authorization
Code
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + KH to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter Class No.
Use the following to enter Class No:
K~I to enter numeric data
J to move cursor left
L to move the cursor right
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 18
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
4
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to allow or deny the feature selection.
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time CO/PBX line key is pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line Key LED
Data
Deny Allow
C
Press
to go to the next page.
A
Press
to go back to the previous page.
G
5
Press
key to transfer data.
6
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Class. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
Notes
1.
Sixteen Classes (00 ~ 15) of feature restriction patterns allow a station user to activate particular features while
restricting others.
2.
At default, all stations are in Class 00.
3.
Stations are assigned to a Class of Service in Memory Block 4-17 (Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment).
4.
LCR/ARS Bypass (Page 3, LK 4) applies only when the station is assigned to an LCR/ARS Class (1~4) in
Memory Block 4-40 (LCR Class Selection). LCR/ARS Bypass does not apply when using access codes to
directly access an ARS Table (functions 601~604 ARS Tables 1~4) in Memory Blocks 1-1-46~48 [Access
Code (1/2/3-Digit) Assignment].
5.
ARS Overflow (Page 6, LK 1) allows or restricts access to Trunk Group 01 when the first priority trunk group
(programmed route) is busy.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 19
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Corresponding
Default
Default
CO/PBX
Function Name
Class 00
Class 01 ~ 15
Line Key
Page 1
LK1
Set Call Forward - All Call, Do Not Disturb (DND), Break Mode
Allow
Deny
LK2
Trunk Queuing
Allow
Deny
LK3
Automatic Callback
Allow
Deny
LK4
Barge-In Originate on a CO/PBX Line (Calling Party)
Deny
Deny
LK5
Barge-In Receive (Called Party)
Allow
Deny
LK6
Timed Alarm (Set/Cancel) From SLT
Allow
Deny
LK7
General Purpose Relay
Allow
Deny
LK8
Voice Override/Tone Override Originate
Allow
Deny
Page 2
LK1
Absence Message
Allow
Deny
LK2
Callback Request Originate
Allow
Deny
LK3
Station Outgoing Lockout (Set/Cancel)
Allow
Deny
LK4
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK5
Call Forward - Busy/ No Answer Set
Allow
Deny
LK6
VRS Voice Message Record/Verify/Erase
Allow
Deny
LK7
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK8
DISA Password Set
Allow
Deny
Page 3
LK1
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK2
User Ringing Line Preference Set/Reset
Allow
Deny
LK3
Voice/Tone Override/Camp-On Receive
Allow
Deny
LK4
LCR/ARS Bypass (Trunk Groups 02~32)
Deny
Deny
LK5
Station Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Deny
Deny
LK6
Account Code Entry
Deny
Deny
LK7
Digit Restriction Time Selection
Allow
Allow
LK8
Call Alert Notification for DIT and DID
Allow
Deny
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 20
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Corresponding
Default
Default
CO/PBX
Function Name
Class 00
Class 01 ~ 15
Line Key
Page 4
LK1
LCR/ARS Recall
Allow
Deny
LK2
DSS Key Transfer Operation
Deny
Deny
LK3
ANI/Caller ID (S4500 or higher for ANI)
Deny
Deny
LK4
ANI/Caller ID Number/Name Selection (S4500 or higher for ANI)
Deny
Deny
If deny is set, Name is displayed if Name and number are received.
If allow is set, Number is displayed if Name and number are received.
LK5
Manual Live Record Activate (Memory Block 1-8-26 must be set.)
Deny
Deny
LK6
Auto Live Record Activate (LK5 must be on, and Memory Block 1-8-26
Deny
Deny
must be set.)
LK7
BGM Selection
Allow
Deny
LK8
Unsupervised Conference
Deny
Deny
Page 5
LK1
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Deny
Deny
LK2
Group Listening Selection
Deny
Deny
LK3
Station Relocation
Allow
Deny
LK4
Set Call Forward Off- Premise (Related to Page 1 LK1 and Page 2
Deny
Deny
LK5)
LK5
Pre-Set Dialing (Allow/Deny)
Deny
Deny
(S2000 or higher)
LK6
Live Monitoring (S3000 or higher)
Deny
Deny
LK7
Caller ID Display Selection
Deny
Deny
If allow is set, Caller ID Name and Number display at the same time.
LK8
Not Used
N/A
N/A
Page 6
LK1
ARS Overflow
Deny
Deny
LK2
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Deny
Deny
LK3
Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Deny
Deny
Deny means Verified; Allow means Unverified
LK4
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK5
Caller ID for K-CCIS
Allow
Deny
LK6~8
Not Used
N/A
N/A
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 21
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-27
Forced Account Code/Authorization
System Mode
Code Length Assignment
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits for the Forced Account Code/
Data No.
Authorization Code.
27
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
¦+BF
No.
Title
Data
2 7 : F O R C E D
1 0 D G T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + BG to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to enter number of digits.
Default Values
10 Digits
Use the following to enter data:
K~I to enter digits
J to move cursor left
L to move cursor right
Setting Data = 01 ~ 13 digits
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1/2/3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Function 146 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
1-1-48
Function 147 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Access
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
Page 2, LK 8 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Programming
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Page 5, LK 1 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Page 6, LK 3 Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 22
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-64
Code Restriction Class (Without Authorization Code) Day Mode Assignment
4-65
Code Restriction Class (Without Authorization Code) Night Mode Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 23
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-33
Master Clock Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
When a DTI-U( ) ETU (T-1), PRT(1)-U( ) ETU, or BRT(4)-U10 ETU is installed,
8
clocking must be synchronized. When this Memory Block is set for Cabinet 0 (default),
the system is set to be a Master Clock source. Programming this Memory Block
Data No.
defines the system to be a slave from its connected source.
33
When the master clock selection is changed, press the Reset switch on the CPU to reset the
system.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AD
Data
Cabinet Slot
No.
Title
0~3
1~8
3 3 : M S T R C L C K
0 :
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CC to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to enter number of digits.
Default Values
Cabinet 0 (Master System)
Use the following to enter data:
K~I to enter digits
J to move cursor left
L to move cursor right
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Example 1: (Elite 100 is Master Clock Source)
Electra Elite
Electra Elite
Electra Elite
T1
T1
DTI
DTI
DTI
DTI
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 4
(200)
(300)
(100)
MB 1-8-33
Cabinet 0
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Setting
Master
Slot 1
Slot 1
(Slave)
(Slave)
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 24
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Example 2: (The PSTN is Master Clock Source)
Electra Elite
ISDN
Electra Elite
Electra Elite
PRI
T1
T1
DTI
PRT
DTI
DTI
DTI
PSTN
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Slot 1
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 4
(100)
(200)
(300)
MB 1-8-33
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Setting
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 1
(Slave)
(Slave)
(Slave)
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Notes
1.
When ISDN/T1 or ISDN/T1 and Wireless trunks are installed, confirm that Switch SW1 is set to the proper
position on the CLKG-U( ) Unit Unit (ISDN.PHS) and assign this Memory Block for proper Master Clock setting.
2.
When only Wireless is installed (No ISDN/T1), this Memory Block should be left at the default setting.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 25
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-11-00
T1 Signal Format Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the signal format of the T1 trunk connected to the
11
system. The signal format used (12- or 24-Multiframe) depends on the channel service
unit/demarcation (CSU/D mark) equipment being used.
Data No.
Display
00
PC Programming
DTI No.
Data
Setting
(01~03)
No.
Title
Data
¦+AD
0 1 / 0 0 : F R A M E
= 2 4
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
12
24
default.
(SF)
(ESF)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Setting Data:
SF = Superframe Format (12-Multiframe)
ESF = Extended Superframe Format (24-Multiframe)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Notes
The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 26
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-11-01
Clear Channel Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the clear channel selection. when the Zero Byte
11
Time channel is available, the CLKG-U10 Unit cannot extract a clock signal from the
T1 trunk. The T1 trunk modifies the Zero Byte Time channel to extract a clock signal
Data No.
for the CLKG-U10 Unit.
01
Display
PC Programming
DTI No.
Data
Setting
(01~03)
No.
Title
Data
¦+AD
0 1 / 0 1 : O B Y T E = Z C S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
ZCS
B8ZS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Notes
The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 27
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-11-02
Line Length Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the distance, in feet, between the channel service
11
unit/demarcation (CSU/D mark) and the DTI-U( ) ETU. This specifies the equalization
values of the detect signal in the DTI-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
Display
02
PC Programming
DTI No.
Data
Setting
(01~03)
No.
Title
Data
¦+AD
0 1 / 0 2 : L I N E
= 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
1
2
3
4
5
default.
(0 - 131)
(132 - 262)
(263 - 393)
(394 - 524
(525 - 655)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
LCD
Line Key
Description
Indication
LK 1
1
0~131 feet
LK 2
2
132~262 feet
LK 3
3
263~393 feet
LK 4
4
394~524 feet
LK 5
5
525~655 feet
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Notes
The DTI-U10/20/30 ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 28
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-11-05
T1 Channel Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the digital trunk interface (DTI) channel numbers to
11
be used. DTI Trunks 1 and 2 have a maximum of 24 channels, and DTI Trunk 3 has a
maximum of 16 channels.
Data No.
Display
05
DTI No.
Data
PC Programming
Channel
(01~03)
No.
Title
No.
¦+AD
0 1 / 0 5 : C H A N E L
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select DTI channel number.
Default Values
Use to following to enter data:
DTI No. 1 Channels 01~24 = Off
C
DTI No. 2 Channels 25~48 = Off
to go to the next page.
DTI No. 3 Channels 49~64 = Off
Channel Numbers (01~24) correspond to CO/PBX line key.
Channel No.
CO/PBX
Line
Page
DTI No.
DTI No.
DTI No.
Key
1
2
3
01~08
01~08
25~32
49~56
1
09~16
09~16
33~40
57~64
2
17~24
17~24
41~48
N/A
3
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded
selection is the
No
Yes
Data
default.
(Not Assigned)
(Assigned)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 29
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Notes
The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 30
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-11-06
Signaling Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify Loop Start (LS) or Ground Start (GS) Trunk
11
Signaling when using T1.
Data No.
Display
06
DTI No.
Data
Channel
Setting
(01~03)
No.
Title
No.
Data
PC Programming
0 1 / 0 6 : T R N K 0 1 = L S
¦+AD
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
LS
GS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write data and advance to the next Channel No.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Channel No. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-11-07
DTI Trunk Type Assignment
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Notes
The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 31
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-11-07
DTI Trunk Type Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the trunk type (CO/E&M Tie line/DID/ANI) four
11
channels at a time. Assignment to an individual channel is impossible.
Data No.
Display
07
Block
DTI No.
Data
No.
Setting
(01~03)
No.
Title
1~6
Data
PC Programming
¦+AD
0 1 / 0 7 : T R K ( 1 )
C O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 6
LK 7
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
CO
E&M
DID
ANI
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Use dial pad keys to change DTI Number (01~03).
4-Channel Unit
Block
No.
DTI
DTI
DTI
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
1
01~04
25~28
49~52
2
05~08
29~32
53~56
3
09~12
33~36
57~60
4
13~16
37~40
61~64
5
17~20
41~44
N/A
6
21~24
45~48
N/A
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 32
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-11-06
Signaling Selection
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Notes
1.
A DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
2.
When the default setting is changed to E&M or DID, the affected trunks are automatically reassigned to Trunk
Group 00. When trunks 01 ~ 08 are affected, default line key assignment for all Multiline Terminals changes to
Not Used and must also be reassigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 33
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-11-08
Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to delete the Information Digits received from the Network on Feature
11
Group D Trunks.
Data No.
Display
08
DTI
Data Block
Setting
01~03
No.
1~6
Title
Data 2
PC Programming
¦+AD
0 1 / 0 8 : 1 D E L
2 D G T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KH to access the Memory Block.
Default Values
2
3 Use the dial pad to enter Setting Data 1 and Setting Data 2.
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter data
KA ~ KC to change DTI Number
Setting Data 1:
4-Channel Unit
Block
No.
DTI
DTI
DTI
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
1
01~04
25~28
49~52
2
05~08
29~32
53~56
3
09~12
33~36
57~60
4
13~16
37~40
61~64
5
17~20
41~44
N/A
6
21~24
45~48
N/A
Setting Data 2:
0
No Delete
1~9
Number of Digits to Delete
G
4
Press
to write the data. Memory Block 1-11-00 is displayed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 34
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
E
5
Program Memory Block 1-11-00 again or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card interface Slot Assignment
1-11-05
T1 Channel Selection
1-11-07
DTI Trunk Type Assignment
Notes
Example of ANI information: KP009727517645STKP7100ST.
00 Information
digits
9727517645
ANI information
7100
DNIS Digits
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 35
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-13-00
PRT Channel Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the available B channels used for PRI.
13
Display
Data No.
PRT
Data
Setting
00
1~8
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 1 / 0 0 : C H A N N E L
| 0 1
¦+AN
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
Channel 13
Channel 14
Channel 15
Channel 16
Page 3
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Channelc17
Channel 18
Channel 19
Channel 20
Channel 21
Channel 22
Channel 23
Channel 24
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded selection is
the default
No (Not
Yes
Data
Assigned)
(Assigned)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK13 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 36
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card interface Slot Assignment
1-13-01
PRT Signal Format Selection
1-13-02
Clear Channel Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
1-13-04
PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority Selection
1-13-05
PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group Assignment
Notes
1.
Only 16 Channels can be assigned with the Elite IPK Basic Port Package.
1.
UP to eight PRT ETUs can be assigned.
2.
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU firmware, version 4.0 or higher is required for individual channel assignment.
3.
When the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU) has firmware, version 3.6 or lower, available channels are Channel 1 to the last
channel assigned in this Memory Block
4.
The number of available channels depends on the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU) assigned in Memory Block 7-1.
For example, when PRT8 is assigned in Memory Block 7-1, any eight channels can be assigned (allowed) in this
Memory Block. Any channel skipped (Not Assigned) is still an available channel from 0 to the last assigned
channel.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 37
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-13-02
Clear Channel Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the clear channel selection. When the Zero Byte
13
Time channel is available, the CLKG-U( ) Unit Unit cannot extract a clock signal from
the PRT trunk. The PRT trunk modifies the Zero Byte Time channel to extract a clock
Data No.
signal for the CLKG-U( ) Unit Unit.
02
Display
PC Programming
PRT
Data
Setting
¦+AN
1~8
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 0 2 : O B Y T E = B 8 Z S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
ZCS
B8ZS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK13 + LB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-13-00
PRT Channel Assignment
1-13-01
PRT Signal Format Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 38
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-13-04
PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
13
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Outgoing Priority for the B-channels when calls
Data No.
are originated on a PRT(1)-U( ) ETU.
04
This assignment is allowed by handset programming and SAT.
PC Programming
¦+AN
NEW
Display
PRT
Data
Setting
1~8
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 0 4 : C H
S L C = H > L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
H L
L H
default.
High to Low Low to High
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK13 + LD to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
1-13-00
PRT Channel Assignment
1-13-01
PRT Signal Format Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
1-13-05
PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 39
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
5-06
Trunk Group Outgoing Priority Selection
Notes
This memory block applies to all firmware versions of the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 40
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-13-05
PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
13
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign a Trunk Group Number to each B channel or any
Data No.
Trunk Group for each B channel. Changing this assignment is not normally required
05
and default should be set. This memory block could be used when different trunks are
used in the same PRI span or for a tenant application where multiple tenants share the
PC Programming
PRI span and separation of B channels is required.
¦+AN
NEW
Display
PRT
Data
B Ch.
Setting Data
1~8
No.
01~23
Trunk Group
0 1 / 0 5 : B
0 1 = T G
0 O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK13 + KE to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Trunk Group.
Default Values
Use the following to enter data:
00, Any Trunk Group
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
00 is Any Trunk Group
01~32 are Trunk Groups 01~32
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next B channel or next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 41
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
1-13-00
PRT Channel Assignment
1-13-01
PRT Signal Format Selection
1-13-02
Clear Channel Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
1-13-04
PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority Selection
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-91
Trunk Type Selection
Notes
1.
This memory block must be coordinated with Memory Block 3-03 (Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment). The
number of assigned channels must be the same or greater (including default) than the number of trunks to a
trunk group assigned In Memory Block 3-03.
For Example, When Memory Block 3-03 has five PRT trunks for Trunk Group 1, this memory block must have at
least five B channels for Trunk Group 1.
2.
This memory block applies only to PRT(1)-U( ) ETU firmware version 4.0 or higher.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 42
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Destination Point Code to the associated
Data No.
Common Signaling Channel when K-CCIS commands are required to pass through a
05
tandem system. This memory block is used for Centralized K-CCIS features.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AW
Data
Setting
C-Channel
No.
Title
Data
1~4
0 5 : T 0 0 1
= 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + KE to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.
Default Values:
Use the following to enter data:
Blank
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ I to enter numeric data
Point Code Range is 00001~16367.
T001~T255 can be assigned.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
Example: Elite 100 is Master for Centralized Day/Night Mode Change (K-CCIS)
Electra Elite IPK
Electra Elite IPK
Electra Elite IPK
10 TG 10
T1
T1
CCIS
DTI
DTI
DTI
DTI
CCIS
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 4
10 TG 10
11 TG 10
System A
System B
System C
PC 00001
PC 00002
PC 00003
(100s)
(200s)
(300s)
¤
Sys B
Sys C
CCH Channel 1
CCH Channel 1
(Attendant)
100
Sys A
Sys B
CCH Channel 1
CCH Channel 2
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 43
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
System A (100s)
System B (200s)
System C (300s)
MB 1-15-03 CCH1 = PC 00001
MB 1-15-03 CCH1 = PC 00002
MB 1-15-03 CCH1 = PC 00003
MB 1-15-04 CCH1 = PC 00002
MB 1-15-04 CCH1 = PC 00001
MB 1-15-04 CCH1 = PC 00002
MB 1-15-04 CCH2 = PC 00003
MB 1-15-05 Not assigned
MB 1-15-05 PC 00003 = CCH2
MB 1-15-05 Not assigned
Notes
This memory block is required for Centralized Billing Client (K-CCIS) and Centralized Day/Night Mode Change
(K-CCIS) features.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 44
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 45
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Office Code to the system when Open
Data No.
Numbering Plan is used.
06
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+AW
0 6 : O F F I C E
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + KF to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:
Use the following to enter data:
Blank
Jto move cursor left.
Lto move cursor right
K~ I to enter numeric data
The Maximum Office Code Number can have four digits and should
include the Access Code for the open numbering plan. Valid range is
0~9999.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 46
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
Notes
The Access Code must be part of the Office Code Number Assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 47
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the Elite IPK to send billing to the Billing Center
Data No.
Office (NEAX2000/2400) across the K-CCIS network. Elite IPK does not support
11
receiving and managing billing information.
PC Programming
¦+AW
NEW
Display
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
1 1 : B I L L I N G
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
Deny
Allow
default.
NO
YS
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + A Ato access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 48
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
Notes
Memory Block 1-15-00 (K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection) does not apply for the Centralized Billing feature
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 49
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of
System Mode
Center Office Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the Common Signaling Channel number and point
Data No.
code of the Billing Center Office (NEAX2000/2400).
12
PC Programming
NEW
¦+AW
Display
Data
C-Ch
Point
No.
Title
1~4
Code
1 2 : B I L C C H O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + AB to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter C-Channel and Point Code.
Default Values:
Use the following to enter data:
Blank
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ I to enter numeric data
Point code range is 00001~16367
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next memory block.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 50
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
Notes
1.
Memory Block 1-15-00 (K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection) is used for the Centralized Day/Night Switching
feature.
2.
This memory block is used for the Remote Office only.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 51
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for
System Mode
Remote Office Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Electra Elite IPK to switch Day/Night mode when
Data No.
it receives the command from a main office.
13
PC Programming
NEW
¦+AW
Display
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
1 3 : C E N
D / N
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
Deny
Allow
default.
(NO)
(YS)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next memory block.
E
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 52
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
Notes
1.
The Electra Elite IPK can be only a Remote Office for a NEAX2000/2400 Billing Center Office.
2.
When the Electra Elite IPK is a tandem office and Billing Information is not required, this assignment is
unnecessary.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 53
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for
System Mode
Main Office Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to activate K-CCIS by assigning a Main or Remote system.
Data No.
14
PC Programming
NEW
¦+AW
Display
Data
Table
Point
C-Ch
No.
01~16
Code
1~4
1 4 : T 0 1 :
=
0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + AB to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Table number, C-Channel, and Point Code.
Default Values:
Use the following to enter data:
All Tables Not Specified
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ I to enter numeric data
Point code range is 00001~16367.
Tables 01~16 can be assigned.
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next memory block.
E
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 54
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
Notes
1.
Memory Block 1-15-00 (K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection) is used for the Centralized Day/Night Switching
feature.
2.
This memory block is used for the Main Office only.
3.
Up to 16 Remote Offices can be controlled by a Main Office.
4.
The Electra Elite IPK cannot be a Main Office for a NEAX2000/2400 PBX.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 55
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify whether or not Auto Negotiation is enabled for each
16
port of the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. When No is selected, Memory Block 1-16-01 (Port
Speed Selection 10/100 Base -T) and Memory Block 1-16-02 (Port Duplex Mode
Data No.
Selection) are used.
00
PC Programming
NEW
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 0 : 1 - 1
A U T O
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + KK to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 56
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 57
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base-T
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify the Ethernet port speed as 10 Base-T or 100
16
Base-TX for each port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
01
NEW
PC Programming
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 1 : 1 - 1
S P E E D
1 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
10
100
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + KAto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 58
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
This memory block is effective only when Memory BLock 1-16-00 (Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection) is set to
NO.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 59
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify duplex mode (HALF or FULL) for each port of each
16
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
02
NEW
PC Programming
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Data
Title
0 2 : 1 - 1
H A L F
D U P L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
HALF
FULL
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + KBto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 60
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
This memory block is effective only when Memory Block 1-16-00 (Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection) is set to
NO.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 61
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify an MDI/MDIX mode for each port of each
16
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
03
NEW
PC Programming
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 3 : 1 - 1
M O D E
A U T O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
MDIX
MDI
Auto
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + KC to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 62
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
MDI/MDIX is an Ethernet port connection using twisted-pair cable. Medium Dependent Interface (MDI) is the
Media Attachment Unit (MAU) component that provides the physical and electrical connection to the cabling
medium. An MDIX (MDI crossover) is an MDI version that enables cabling between like devices. MDI ports
connect to MDIX ports using straight-through twisted-pair cabling; both MDI-to-MDI and MDIX to-MDIX
connections use crossover Twisted-pair cabling.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 63
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify when VLAN is enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
16
Data No.
04
NEW
PC Programming
Display
¦+AB
Data
HUB
Setting
No.
1~3
Title
Data
0 4 : 1
V L A N
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + KD to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 64
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
A virtual (logical) LAN is a local area network with a definition that maps workstations on a basis other than
geographic location (for example: department, user type, or primary application). The virtual LAN controller can
change or add workstations and manage load balancing and bandwidth allocation easier than with a physical
picture of the LAN. Network management software keeps track of relating the virtual picture of the LAN with the
actual physical picture.
3.
When VLAN Mode is enabled, the port based Tag VLAN feature can be used. In Tag VLAN mode, a received
packet is switched according to a combination of the Address and VLAN ID. When the incoming packet is not
tagged or VLAN ID = 0, the VLAN ID is set to the default assigned by Memory Block 1-16-05 (Default VLAN ID
Assignment). Default LAN ID range is 0001~4095 (0x001~0xfff Hex).
4.
For Tag VLAN feature, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU has a VLAN table and an entry in the table is Media Access Control
(MAC) address and VLAN ID source dependent. Therefore, multiple entries could have the same address with
different VLAN IDs.
5.
VLAN table ports 1~4 are members of VLAN1, and the tag is removed before forwarding to all ports.
VLAN table ports 1 and 5~8 are members of VLAN2, and the tag is added to the untagged packet (or tagged
packet remains) before being forwarded to ports 5~8.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 65
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to assign a default VLAN ID for an internal VLAN table for each
16
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. When no Tag is received, the switching HUB can add a new Tag
and forward the packet to another port, and at that time, insert a VLAN ID that
Data No.
corresponds to the received Media Access Control (MAC) address.
05
PC Programming
NEW
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 5 : 1 - 1
I D
=
0 0 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + KG to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:
Use the following to enter data:
All ports = 0001
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ I to enter numeric data
VLAN ID range is 0001~4095 (0x001~ 0xfff Hex).
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 66
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed per cabinet.
2.
When Memory Block 1-16-04 (VLAN Mode Selection) is set to YS, this port based Tag VLAN feature can be
used. In the Tag VLAN mode, a received packet is switched according to a combination of the MAC address and
VLAN ID. When the incoming packet is not tagged or the VLAN ID = 0, the VLAN ID is set to the default ID
specified by this memory block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 67
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify the Quality of Service (QoS) mode for each port of
16
each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
06
NEW
PC Programming
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 6 : 1 - 1
Q o S
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
NO
selection is the
LO
HI
(Not
default.
Low
High
Assigned)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + KF to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 68
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
In networks, QoS indicates that transmission rates, error rates, and other characteristics can be measured,
improved, and to some extent, guaranteed in advance. QoS is particularly important for continuous transmission
of high-bandwidth video, multimedia, and voice information.
3.
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU has two priority assignment methods: Port Based Priority (packet received) or Tag Based
Priority. Unknown Unicast Packets are always set for Low priority.
The Port Based Priority feature can assign priority of all packets except the Unknown Unicast Packets.
The priority of received packets is always that assigned by this memory block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 69
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify a Receive Tag Priority for each port of the
16
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
07
NEW
PC Programming
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 7 : 1 - 1
H I G H
R X = 7
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + KG to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:
Use the following to enter data:
All ports = 7
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ I to enter numeric data
Priority range is lowest 0~7 highest.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 70
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
This memory block selects which priority field to assign as High. When a received packer contains a Tag per
IEEE802.1q definition, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can assign high priority based on this memory block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 71
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
When a packet is received without a Tag, this memory block can add a High Priority
16
Packet Tag for each port of the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
08
NEW
PC Programming
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 8 : 1 - 1
H I G H
T X = 7
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + KH to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:
Use the following to enter data:
All ports = 7
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ I to enter numeric data
Priority range is lowest 0~7 highest.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 72
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
When the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU transmits a packet in VLAN mode, the priority field can be assigned for each packet
transmitted by the assignment of this memory block.
This memory block assigns the priority value for High Priority Packets. Memory Block 1-16-09 (Low Priority TX
Tag Assignment) assigns the priority for Low Priority Packets.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 73
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
System
ste Mod
o e
1
General Description
Submo
m de
When a packet is received without a Tag, this memory block can add a Low Priority
16
Packet Tag for each port of the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
Data
08
09
NEW
PC
P Progr
r
am
a min
i g
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 9 : 1 - 1
L O W
T X
= 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + KH to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:
Use the following to enter data:
All ports = 0
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ I to enter numeric data
Priority range is lowest 0~7 highest.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 74
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
When the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU transmits a packet in VLAN mode, the priority field can be assigned for each packet
transmitted by the assignment of this memory block.
This memory block assigns the priority value for Low Priority Packets. Memory Block 1-16-08 (High Priority TX
Tag Assignment) assigns the priority for High Priority Packets.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 75
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify whether or not Port Mirroring is enabled for each
16
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
10
NEW
PC Programming
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
Setting
No.
1~3
Title
Data
1 0 : 1
M I R R O R
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
The shaded
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
selection is the
default.
NO
YS
(Normal)
(Mirror)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + AK to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 76
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an eight-port switching HUB. One port can be set as a source port, and one port can be
set as a target port for port mirroring to monitor traffic data.
3.
To allow this function, set this memory block to YS, and program Memory Block 1-16-11 (Mirroring Source Port
Selection) and Memory Block 1-16-12 (Mirroring Target Port Selection).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 77
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify an output port for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU when Port
16
Mirroring is enabled.
Data No.
11
NEW
PC Programming
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
Setting
No.
1~3
Title
Data
1 1 : 1
S O U R C E
= 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + AA to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:
Use the following to enter data:
Port 1
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ I to enter numeric data
Port range is 1~8.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 78
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an eight-port switching HUB. One port can be set as a source port, and one port can be
set as a target port for port mirroring to monitor traffic data.
To allow this function, set Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring Selection) to YS, and program Memory Block 1-
16-12 (Mirroring Target Port Selection).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 79
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify a target port for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU when Port
16
Mirroring is enabled.
Data No.
12
NEW
PC Programming
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
Setting
No.
1~3
Title
Data
1 2 : 1
T A R G E T
= 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + KH to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:
Use the following to enter data:
Port 1
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ I to enter numeric data
Port range is 1~8.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 80
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an eight-port switching HUB. One port can be set as a source port, and one port can be
set as a target port for port mirroring to monitor traffic data.
To allow this function, set Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring Selection) to YS, and program Memory Block 1-
16-11 (Mirroring Source Port Selection).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 81
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a VLAN ID to each VLAN Group.
16
Data No.
13
NEW
PC Programming
Display
¦+AB
Data
HUB
VLAN Gp
Setting
No.
1~3
Title
01~16
Data
1 3 : 1
1 D
0 1 = 0 0 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + AC to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:
Use the following to enter data:
0001 (0x001 Hex
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ I to enter numeric data
ID range is 0001~4095 (0x001~ 0xfff Hex).
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU and VLAN Group.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 82
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 83
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify VLAN Ports to each VLAN Group.
16
Data No.
14
NEW
PC Programming
Display
¦+AB
Data
HUB
VLAN Gp Port Setting
No.
1~3
Title
01~16
1~8
Data
1 4 : 1
P O R T 0 1 = 1
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
The shaded
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
selection is the
default.
NO
YS
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + AD to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU and VLAN Group.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 84
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 85
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Tag Insertion is enabled for each
16
VLAN Group.
Data No.
15
NEW
PC Programming
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
VLAN Gp Port Setting
No.
1~3
Title
01~16
1~8
Data
1 5 : 1
T A G
0 1 = 1
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
The shaded
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
selection is the
default.
NO
YS
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + AE to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU and VLAN Group.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 86
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 87
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
16
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Full duplex IEEE802.3x Flow Control
Data No.
is enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.
16
PC Programming
NEW
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
1 6 : 1 - 1
F L O W
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
The shaded
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
selection is the
default.
NO
YS
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + AF to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 88
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
VLAN Group and Port selection
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 89
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Back Pressure Flow Control is
16
enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.
Data No.
17
NEW
PC Programming
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
1 7 : 1 - 1
B A C K
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
The shaded
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
selection is the
default.
NO
YS
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + AG to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 90
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection
Notes
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 91
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-12
Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the music on hold source for each CO/PBX line.
--
Display
Data No.
CO/PBX
12
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 1
1 2 : H O L D
C O 0 0
¦+BCT
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+AB access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign the music selection.
Default Values
Use the following to enter data:
00 = Not Assigned for CO/PBX No. 01~64
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
OR
D
to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-4-17
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Hold Tone Selection
1-8-09
Music on Hold Pattern Selection
1-8-31
Hold Tone Source Assignment
1-8-32
Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection
3-11
CO External Source Selection
4-66
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 92
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-47
ISDN Directory Number Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the directory Number is presented to
--
the Network when a call is placed from the programmed station.
Data No.
Display
47
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+AN
0 1 / 4 7 : C I D
Y E S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YES
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + DG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-52
ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment
3-91
Trunk Type Assignment
4-62
ISDN-PRI Directory Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 93
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
BRI:
1.
When this Memory Block is set to No, the station placing an outgoing call does not present the programmed
number in Memory Block 3-52 assigned for the BRI Trunks. The Network presents Restricted for the Caller ID
information.
2.
When this Memory Block is set to YES, the station placing an outgoing call presents the programmed number in
Memory Block 3-52 assigned for the BRI Trunks. The Network presents the programmed number as Caller ID.
PRI:
1.
For ISDN-PRI Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station, PRT firmware version 3.50 or higher is
required
2.
When this Memory Block is set to No, and ISDN-PRI is used in CO Mode in Memory Block 3-91, the programmed
number in Memory Block 3-52 is not presented as Caller ID. The Network presents Restricted for the Caller ID
information.
3.
When this Memory Block is set to YES, and ISDN-PRI is used in CO Mode in Memory Block 3-91, the
programmed number in Memory Block 3-52 is presented as Caller ID. The Network presents the programmed
number as Caller ID.
4.
When this Memory Block is set to No, and ISDN-PRI is used in DID Mode in Memory Block 3-91, the
programmed number in Memory Block 3-52 is not presented as Caller ID.
5.
When this Memory Block is set to YES, and ISDN-PRI is used in DID Mode in Memory Block 3-91, the
programmed number in Memory Block 4-62 is presented as Caller ID. The Network presents the programmed
number as Caller ID.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 94
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-50
Multiline Terminal Type Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a DTH/DTP/DTR/DTU-32-1 TEL, DTH/DTP/DTR-
--
32D-1 TEL, or DTU-32D-2 TEL with 16 Line Keys or 24 Line Keys.
Data No.
Display
50
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTM
0 1 / 5 0 : M L T
T P
1 6
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
16
24
24A
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + EK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 if you want 24 line keys for Tel Port No.
Default Values
Use the following to enter data:
All stations have 16 line keys.
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
OR
D
to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B
+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B
+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B
+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 95
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
1.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
2.
Line Key Orientation:
LK = Line Keys
OT = One-touch keys
DTP/DTU-32-1 TEL or DTP-32D-1 or DTU-32D-2
16 Line Key Mode
24 Line Key Mode
LK1
LK2
LK3
LK4
OT 1
OT 9
LK1
LK2
LK3
LK4
LK17
LK21
LK5
LK6
LK7
LK8
OT 2
OT 10
LK5
LK6
LK7
LK8
LK18
LK22
LK9
LK10
LK11
LK12
OT 3
OT 11
LK9
LK10
LK11
LK12
LK19
LK23
LK13
LK14
LK15
LK16
OT 4
OT 12
LK13
LK14
LK15
LK16
LK20
LK24
OT 5
OT 13
OT 1
OT 5
OT 6
OT 14
OT 2
OT 6
OT 7
OT 15
OT 3
OT 7
OT 8
OT 16
OT 4
OT 8
DTH/DTR-32D-1 TEL
16 Line Key Mode
24 Line Key Mode
LK1
LK2
LK3
LK4
LK5
LK6
LK7
LK8
LK1
LK2
LK3
LK4
LK5
LK6
LK7
LK8
LK9
LK10
LK11
LK12
LK13
LK14
LK15
LK16
LK9
LK10
LK11
LK12
LK13
LK14
LK15
LK16
OT1
OT2
OT3
OT4
OT5
OT6
OT7
OT8
LK17
LK18
LK19
LK20
OT 1
OT 2
OT 3
OT 4
OT9
OT10 OT11
OT12 OT13 OT14 OT15 OT16
LK21
LK22
LK23
LK24
OT 5
OT 6
OT 7
OT 8
24A Line Key Mode
LK1
LK2
LK3
LK4
LK5
LK6
LK7
LK8
LK9
LK10
LK11
LK12
LK13
LK14
LK15
LK16
LK17
LK18
LK19
LK20
LK21
LK22
LK23
LK24
OT 1
OT 2
OT 3
OT 4
OT 5
OT 6
OT 7
OT 8
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 96
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-64
Code Restriction Class (without
CO/PBX Line Mode
Authorization Code) Day Mode
4
Assignment
Submode
--
Data No.
General Description
64
Use this Memory Block to specify the Code Restriction Class per station in Day Mode
when Forced Account Code/Authorization Code is set in Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class
PC Programming
of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2] and a call is made without using a Forced
Account Code/Authorization Code.
¦+AC
NEW
Display
Tel Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 6 4 : C L S
D A Y = 1 5
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + FD to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to change Day Mode Restriction Class for Tel port No.
Default Value
Use the following to enter data:
All Stations Class 15
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
OR
D
Press
to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B
Press
+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109.
B
Press
+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119.
B
Press
+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 97
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code(1,2,3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Function 146 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
1-1-48
Function 147 Forced Account Code/Authorization code Access
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
Page 2, LK 8 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Programming
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Page 5, LK 1 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Page 6, LK 3 Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
1-8-27
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Length Assignment
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-65
Code Restriction Class (without authorization code) Night Mode Assignment
Notes
Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 98
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-65
Code Restriction Class (without
CO/PBX Line Mode
Authorization Code) Night Mode
4
Assignment
Submode
--
Data No.
General Description
65
Use this Memory Block to specify the Code Restriction Class per station in Night Mode
when Forced Account Code/Authorization Code is set in Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class
PC Programming
of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2] and a call is made without using a Forced
Account Code/Authorization Code.
¦+AC
NEW
Display
Tel Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 6 5 : C L S
N T
= 1 5
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + FE to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to change Night Mode Restriction Class for Tel port No.
Default Value
Use the following to enter data:
All Stations Class 15
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter Restriction Class or Tel Port No.
OR
D
Press
to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B
Press
+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109.
B
Press
+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119.
B
Press
+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 99
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code(1,2,3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Function 146 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
1-1-48
Function 147 Forced Account Code/Authorization code Access
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
Page 2, LK 8 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Programming
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Page 5, LK 1 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Page 6, LK 3 Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
1-8-27
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Length Assignment
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-64
Code Restriction Class (without authorization code) Day Mode Assignment
Notes
Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 100
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-66
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to assign MOH or Ring Back Tone for the outside party when a
--
trunk call is placed on hold by the Transfer key on a Multiline Terminal, hook flash from
a Single Line Telephone, or the Transfer or Hold key at a PSII station.
Data No.
66
PC Programming
NEW
¦+BTT
Display
Tel Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 6 6 : H O L D
M O H
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
MOH
RBT
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + FF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the setting data option.
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter Tel Port No.
OR
D
Press
to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B
Press
+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109.
B
Press
+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119.
B
Press
+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120.
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next memory block.
E
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 101
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-09
Music on Hold Pattern Selection
1-8-31
Hold Tone Source Assignment
1-8-32
Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection
3-11
CO External Source Selection
3-12
Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment
Notes
Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 102
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-67
IP Station Number Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to assign a station number for each IP telephone supported by
--
the IPCA( )-U10 ETU.
Data No.
67
NEW
PC Programming
¦+BTT
Display
Tel Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 6 7 : I P
I C M
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + EG to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to assign a 2- (00~99), 3- (000~999) or 4-digit (0000~9999) station number for each Tel Port No.:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
OR
D
Press
to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B
Press
+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B
Press
+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B
Press
+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5 Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1/2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Function 001 Station Number
1-2-03
2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection
1-2-32
IP Phone Block Assignment
4-10
Station number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 103
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 104
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-68
LCD Line Key Name Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to assign a name to each LCD Line Key of the DTH/
--
DTR-16LD-1 Telephone. Up to eight characters can be assigned.
Data No.
68
NEW
PC Programming
¦+BTT
Display
Tel Port
Data
Line Key
(01~CO)
No.
01~16
Title
0 1 / 6 8 : L K 0 1
N A M E
< C O
0 1
>
Setting Data
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + FH to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to change Line key number or name.
Default Value
Use the following to enter data:
LK01~08: C0 01~08
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter Name, Line key number or Tel Port No.
OR
D
Press
to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B
Press
+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109.
B
Press
+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119.
B
Press
+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Line key and name.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Line key assignment. After Line key 16 is
programmed, the next Tel Port No. is displayed. When you want to program less
D
than 16 keys, after the last Line key to program, press
to go to next
assigned Tel Port No. After all Tel Ports are assigned, the next memory block is
displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 105
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 106
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
1.
Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
2.
The name can be entered using the dial pad. Follow the procedures in Appendix B Character Codes.
3.
The default names listed in the table below are assigned based on the line key type from Memory Block 4-12
(Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode)
LK Assign
Default
Note
NON (not assigned)
All Blank
CO Outside Lines
CO^xx
xx=Port 01~64
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
CFB
Call Forward All Calls
CFA
xx=Block 00~47
Call Appearance Keys (CAP)
CAPxx-yy
yy=Key 01~24
Programmable One-Touch Keys
FA xx
xx=key 01~24
Trunk Group
TKGP^xx
xx=Trunk Group 01~32
Route Advance Group
ADV^xx
xx=Group 01~16
SIE including CAR
SIE^xxx
xxx=Port No. 01~99, AO~CO
Microphone
MIC
Headset On/Off Key
HSET
Scroll Key for Caller ID indication
SCROLL
Do Not Disturb On/Off
DND
Log On/Off
LOG
BGM On/Off
BGM
Intercom Key
ICM
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 107
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-92
Receiving Volume Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether receiving volume is returned to normal
--
(DOWN) or kept as is (UP) on a call after hanging up.
Data No.
Display
92
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTT
0 1 / 9 2 : R C V
D O W N
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
DOWN
UP
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + IB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to keep volume UP after hanging up a call.
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
OR
D
to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B
+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B
+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B
+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes
When UP is assigned in this memory block, and a user sets the handset volume to maximum, the volume is reset
to a level to meet FCC standard when the user hangs up.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 108
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
5-06
Trunk Group Outgoing Priority
Trunk Group Mode
Selection
5
Submode
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the Outgoing Priority for trunk access to each Trunk
Data No.
Group. This is normally used with a Tie Line or K-CCIS network to reverse the search
06
order and reduce call collisions during trunk seizure.
PC Programming
¦+ALN
NEW
Display
Trunk
Group
Data
Setting
(01~32)
Title
No.
Data
0 1 / 0 6 : P R I O R .
H > L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
H L
L H
2
3
4
default.
High to Low Low to High
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK5 +
+KFto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Function 201~232 Route Advance Block 01~32
1-1-48
Function 401~416 Closed Number Block 01~32
Function 601~604 ARS Table 1~4
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-49
Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment
1-14-04
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 109
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
ETU Mode
7
General Description
Slot
Use this Memory Block to specify the installed ETU.
1
Display Port Number for COI 4, TLI, DID, SLI 4, OPX, DPH, VRS, VMS 2/4 ETU
Data No.
Upper
Page
Slot
--
No.
No.
PC Programming
1
0 9 : N O N
¦+BS
1
0 1 : C O I
4
= 0 1
Cabinet Lower
Unit Name
Port No.
No.
Slot
1st of 4
0~3
No.
Port Number for COI 8, TLI, DID, ESI 8, SLI 8, BRT
Upper
Page
Slot
Port No.
No.
No.
1st of 4
1
0 9 :
= 0 5
1
0 1 : E S I
8
= 0 1
Cabinet Lower
Unit Name
Port No.
No.
Slot
1st of 4
0~3
No.
Port Number for ESI 16 ETU
Upper
Page
Slot
Port No.
No.
No.
1st of 8
6
:
= 0 9
1
0 1 : E S I B
1 6
= 0 1
Cabinet Lower
Unit Name
Port No.
No.
Slot
1st of 8
0~3
No.
Port Number for DTI or PRT
Page
Port Nos.
No.
1st of 4
6
0 1 0 5 0 9 1 3 1 7 2 4
1
0 1 : D T I
2 4
= 0 1
Cabinet Lower
Unit Name
Board No.
No.
Slot
0~3
No.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 110
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK7 + LK1 to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the Line key to enter Setting Data:
Page 1
Page 2
Line Key
Setting Data
LCD Indication
Line Key
Setting Data
LCD Indication
1
NON
1
ESI(8)-U10
ESI 8
2
COI(4)-U10/COIB(4)-U( )
COI 4
2
NON
3
COI(8)-U10/COIB(8)-U10
COI 8
3
SLI(8)/CNF(8)-U10
SLI 8
4
NON
4
OPX(2)-U10
OPX
5
COID(4)-U10/COIB(4)-U( )
COID 4
VDH2(8)-U10
5
VDH
(Refer to Note 7)
6
COID(8)-U10/COIB(8)-U10
COID 8
6
DPH(4)-U10
DPH
7
TLI(2)-U10
TLI
7
PBR( )-U10
PBR
8
DID(4)-U10
DID
8
ECR-U10
ECR
Page 3
Page 4
Line Key
Setting Data
LCD Indication
Line Key
Setting Data
LCD Indication
1
VRS(4)-U10
VRS
1
MIFA-U10
MIFA
2
NON
2
CCH(4)-U10
CCH
VMS(2)/(4)/FMS(2)/(4)-U10/
3
NON
3
VMS 4
CMS(2)/(4)-U10
4
NON
4
CTI/FMS/VMS(8)-U10
VMS 8
5
NON
5
BRT(4)-U10
BRT
6
NON
6
NON
7
BSU(2)-U10
BSU 2
7
NON
8
SLI(4)-U10
SLI 4
8
MIFM-U10
MIFM
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 111
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4
Use the Line key to enter Setting Data:
Page 5
Page 6
Line Key
Setting Data
LCD Indication
Line Key
Setting Data
LCD Indication
1
ESIB8-U10
ESIB8
1
DTI-U( )
DTI4
2
ESIB16-U10
ESIB16
2
DTI-U( )
DTI8
3
MG(8)-U10
MG
3
DTI-U( )
DTI12
4
HUB(8)-U10
HUB
4
DTI-U( )
DTI16
5
NON
5
DTI-U( )
DTI20
6
NON
6
DTI-U( )
DTI24
7
NON
7
NON
8
NON
8
NON
Page 7
Line Key
Setting Data
LCD Indication
1
PRT(1)-U( )
PRT4
2
PRT(1)-U( )
PRT8
3
PRT(1)-U( )
PRT12
4
PRT(1)-U( )
PRT16
5
PRT(1)-U( )
PRT20
6
PRT(1)-U( )
PRT24
7
NON
8
NON
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
C
Press
to go to the next page.
A
Press
to go to the previous page.
B
5
To assign upper Slot No. for DTI-U( ) or PRT(1)-U( ), press
.
G
6
Press
to write the data.
E
7
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 112
Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Basic KTU
PORT NO.
SLOT 1~8
SLOT 1, A
ETU
(Refer to ,1)
EXP KTU
SLOT 1~8
BRT(4)-U( ) ETU
C
O
O
BSU(2)-U( ) ETU
B
O
CCH(4)-U( ) ETU
H
O
COI(4)-U( )/COIB(4)-U( ) ETU
C
O
O
COI(8)-U( )/COIB(8)-U( )
C
O
COID(4)-U( )/COIB(4)-U( )
C
O
O
COID(8)-U( )/COIB(8)-U( )
C
O
O
DID(4)-U( ) ETU
C
O
DPH(4)-U( ) ETU
O
DTI-U( ) ETU
C
O
ECR-U( ) ETU
O
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU
T
O
ESIB(8)-U( )/ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU
T
O
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU
U
O
MG(8)-U( )
C
O
MIFA-U( ) ETU
O
MIFM-U( )
O
OPX(2)-U( ) ETU
T
O
PBR( )-U( ) ETU
O
PRT(1)-U( ) ETU
C
O
SLI(4)-U( ) ETU
T
O
SLI(8)-U( )/CNF(8)-U( ) ETU
T
O
TLI(2)-U( ) ETU
C
O
VDH2(8)-U( )
T
O
VMS/FMS/CMS(2)/(4)-U( )
T
O
VMS/FMS/CTI/(8)-U( )
T
O
VRS(4)-U( ) ETU
V
O
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Elite Enhancement Guide to IPK
5 - 113
Document Revison 1
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
,1 C:
Port Number of CO/PBX Line
T:
Telephone Port Number (smallest number is displayed)
V:
Voice Recording Service Package
:
No Display
B:
BSU No.
H:
CCH No.
U:
HUB No.
Notes
1.
ETU interface cards are assigned automatically during initial power up.
2.
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU with ports 01 and 02 cannot be changed.
3.
When ETU system capacity is exceeded, ERROR is displayed on the LCD, and the Transfer key cannot be used
to write data.
4.
When changing an interface slot assignment to a different ETU, use the following procedure:
a.
Remove the ETU installed in the slot.
H Power off ACD(8), VoIP, VMS, IPCA, or FMS ETU before removing it.
b.
Program the slot for new ETU in this Memory Block.
c.
Install the new ETU.
5.
VMS(2)/FMS(2)-U( )ETU must be assigned as a VMS(4)/FMS(4)-U( ) ETU.
6.
Eight BSU(2)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in the EXP Electra Elite IPK. Only three can be installed in the Basic
Electra Elite IPK.
7.
Page 2, LK 5 is used for indication only. The VDH2(8)-U( ) ETU cannot be assigned.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-3-00
MIF(ACD) Assignment
7-3-01
MIF(LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF(SMDR) Assignment
7-3-03
MIF(UCD) Assignment
7-3-04
MIF(Caller ID) Assignment
1-2-04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-21
PS Telephone Block Assignment
1-2-32
IP Phone Block Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
5 - 114
Document Outline